Dukane Projector 8755G RJ User Manual

Portable LCD Projector  
Model 8755G-RJ  
8912-RJ  
USER’S MANUAL  
#070027  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Projector  
8755G-RJ/8912-RJ  
User's Manual (detailed)  
Operating Guide  
Thank you for purchasing this projector.  
WARNING Before using this product, please read the “Safety Guide”  
first. After reading, store in a safe place for future reference.  
About this manual  
Various symbols are used in this manual. The meanings of these symbols are  
described below.  
WARNING This symbol indicates information that, if ignored, could possibly  
result in personal injury or even death due to incorrect handling.  
CAUTION This symbol indicates information that, if ignored, could possibly  
result in personal injury or physical damage due to incorrect  
handling.  
Please refer to the pages written following this symbol.  
NOTE • The information in this manual is subject to change without notice.  
• The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual.  
• The reproduction, transfer or copy of all or any part of this document is not permitted  
without express written consent.  
Trademark acknowledgment  
• Mac is registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.  
• VESA and SVGA are trademarks of the Video Electronics Standard Association.  
• Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.  
All other trademarks are the properties of their respective owners.  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Contents  
About this manual. . . . . . . . . . 1  
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2  
Projector features. . . . . . . . . . 3  
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
Contents of package . . . . . . . . . . . . .3  
Fastening the lens cover . . . . . . . . . .3  
Part names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4  
Projector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4  
Control panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5  
Rear panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5  
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6  
Setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7  
Connecting your devices. . . . . . . . .10  
Connecting power supply . . . . . . . .12  
Using the security bar and slot . . . .12  
PICTURE menu . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
BRIGHTNESS, CONTRAST, GAMMA, COLOR TEMP,  
COLOR, TINT, SHARPNESS, MY MEMORY  
IMAGE menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
ASPECT, OVER SCAN, V POSITION, H POSITION,  
H
PHASE, H SIZE, AUTO ADJUST EXECUTE  
INPUT menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
PROGRESSIVE, VIDEO NR, COLOR SPACE,  
COMPONENT, VIDEO FORMAT,  
FRAME LOCK, COMPUTER IN,  
RESOLUTION  
SETUP menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
AUTO KEYSTONE  
EXECUTE, KEYSTONE  
,
WHISPER, MIRROR, VOLUME,  
SPEAKER, AUDIO  
SCREEN menu. . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
LANGUAGE, MENU POSITION, BLANK,  
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
Putting batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13  
About the remote control signal. . . .13  
Changing the frequency of remote  
control signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14  
Using as a  
START UP, M  
, M  
,
yScreen  
yScreen Lock  
MESSAGE, SOURCE NAME  
OPTION menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
AUTO SEARCH, AUTO KEYSTONE  
AUTO ON, AUTO OFF, LAMP TIME,  
,
FILTER TIME, MY BUTTON, SERVICE,  
SECURITY  
simple PC mouse & keyboard . . .14  
Power on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
Turning on the power. . . . . . . . . . . .15  
Turning off the power. . . . . . . . . . . .15  
NETWORK menu . . . . . . . . . . 51  
DHCP, IP ADDRESS, SUBNET MASK,  
DEFAULT GATEWAY, TIME DEFFERENCE,  
DATE AND TIME, e-SHOT, INFORMATION,  
SERVICE  
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54  
Air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56  
Internal clock battery . . . . . . . . . . . .57  
Other care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58  
Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
Adjusting the volume. . . . . . . . . . . .16  
Temporarily muting the sound . . . . .16  
Selecting an input signal . . . . . . . . .16  
Searching an input signal . . . . . . . .17  
Selecting an aspect ratio. . . . . . . . .17  
Adjusting the projector's elevator . .18  
Adjusting the zoom and focus . . . . .18  
Using the automatic adjustment feature . .19  
Adjusting the position . . . . . . . . . . .19  
Correcting the keystone distortions. .20  
Using the magnify feature . . . . . . . .20  
Freezing the screen. . . . . . . . . . . . .21  
Temporarily blanking the screen . . .21  
Using the menu function . . . . . . . . .22  
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . 59  
Related messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . .59  
Regarding the indicator lamps. . . . .60  
Shutting the projector down. . . . . . .61  
Resetting all settings . . . . . . . . . . . .61  
Phenomena that may be easy  
to be mistaken for machine defects . .62  
EASY MENU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
Network Guide . . . . . . . . . 1-35  
ASPECT, AUTO KEYSTONE  
EXECUTE,  
KEYSTONE  
, PICTURE MODE, BRIGHTNESS,  
CONTRAST, COLOR, TINT, SHARPNESS,  
WHISPER, MIRROR, RESET, FILTER TIME,  
Technical Guide . . . . . . . . 1-17  
Safety Guide . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9  
LANGUAGE, G  
o to Advanced Menu...  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Projector features / Preparations  
Projector features  
This projector has a capability to project various picture signals onto a screen.  
This projector requires only a minimal amount of space for installation and can  
produce a large projected image from even a short distance.  
This projector boasts a variety of I/O port and low noise. These features provide  
you with the broad use of this projector.  
Preparations  
Contents of package  
Please see the “Contents of package” section in the User’s Manual (concise)  
which is a book. Your projector should come with the items shown there. Contact  
immediately your dealer if anything is missing.  
NOTE • Keep the original packing materials, for future reshipment. Be sure  
to use the original packing materials when moving the projector. Use special  
caution for the lens.  
Fastening the lens cover  
To avoid losing the lens cover, please fasten the  
lens cover to the projector using the enclosed strap.  
Fix the strap to the strap hole of the lens cover.  
1.  
Thread one end of the strap through the strap hole  
of the lens cover and make the loop at the end, and  
let the other end of the strap through the loop. Not  
have a knot in the strap at either end.  
Fix the strap to the strap hole of the projector.  
Thread the other end of the strap through the strap hole of the projector and make  
the loop there. Let the lens cover with the one end of strap though the loop.  
2.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Part names  
Part names  
(1)  
(2) (3) (4)  
HOT!  
Projector  
(1) Lamp cover ( 54)  
The lamp unit is inside.  
(6)  
(9)  
(2) Focus ring ( 18)  
(11)  
(10)  
(3) Zoom ring ( 18)  
(8)  
(4) Control panel ( 5)  
(5) Elevator buttons (x 2) ( 18)  
(5)  
(6)  
(6) Elevator feet (x 2) ( 18)  
(7)  
(6)  
(7) Remote sensor ( 13)  
(8) Lens ( 18, 58)  
(9) Lens cover ( 3)  
(6)  
(10) Intake vents  
(11) Filter cover ( 56)  
(10)  
The air filter and intake vent are  
inside.  
(11)  
(13)  
HOT!  
(19)  
(12) Speaker ( 35)  
(13) Exhaust vent  
(4)  
(12)  
(14) AC inlet ( 12)  
(15) Power switch ( 15)  
(16) Rear panel ( 5)  
(17) Security bar ( 12)  
(18)  
(14)  
(18) Security slot ( 12)  
(19) Slot cover ( 57)  
(16)  
The internal clock battery is  
inside.  
(15)  
(1)  
(17)  
(13)  
WARNING HOT! : Do not touch around the lamp cover and the exhaust  
vents during use or just after use, since it is too hot.  
►Do not look into the lens or vents while the lamp is on, since the strong light  
is not good for your eyes.  
►Do not handle the elevator buttons without holding the projector, since the  
projector may drop down.  
CAUTION Maintain normal ventilation to prevent the projector from heating  
up. Do not cover, block or plug up the vents. Do not place anything that can stick or  
be sucked to the vents, around the intake vents. Clean the air filter periodically.  
►Do not use the security bar and slot to prevent the projector from falling  
down, since it is not designed for it.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Part names  
Control panel  
(6)  
(5)  
(4)  
(1) STANDBY/ON button ( 15)  
(2) INPUT button ( 16, 22)  
(3) MENU button ( 22)  
It consists of four cursor buttons.  
(4) POWER indicator ( 15, 60)  
(5) TEMP indicator ( 60)  
(6) LAMP indicator ( 60)  
(1)  
(3)  
(2)  
Rear panel  
(1) AUDIO IN1 port ( 10)  
(9) USB port ( 10)  
(2) AUDIO IN2 port ( 10)  
(10) COMPONENT  
(3) AUDIO OUT port ( 10)  
(Y, Cb/Pb, Cr/Pr) port ( 10)  
(4) COMPUTER IN1 port ( 10)  
(11) VIDEO port ( 10)  
(5) COMPUTER IN2 port ( 10)  
(12) S-VIDEO port ( 10)  
(6) MONITOR OUT port ( 10)  
(13) AUDIO IN3 (L,R) ports ( 10)  
(7) Shutdown switch ( 61)  
(14) LAN port ( 10)  
(8) CONTROL port ( 10)  
(14)  
(1) (3) (4)  
(5)  
(6) (7)  
BATTERY  
(2) (8) (9) (10)(11) (13) (12)  
CAUTION ►Use the shutdown switch only when the projector is not turned  
off by normal procedure, since pushing this switch stops operation of the  
projector without cooling it down.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Part names  
Remote control  
(2)  
(1)  
(5)  
(10)  
(8)  
(9)  
(11)  
(16)  
(17)  
(20)  
(22)  
(3)  
(4)  
(6)  
(1) VIDEO button ( 17)  
VIDEO  
SEARCH  
AUTO  
COMPUTER  
(2) COMPUTER button ( 16)  
BLANK  
ASPECT  
(7)  
(3) SEARCH button ( 17)  
MAGNIFY  
HOME  
END  
PAGE UP  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
(12)  
(14)  
(15)  
(13)  
(19)  
(18)  
(21)  
(23)  
(25)  
ON  
(4) STANDBY/ON button ( 15)  
PAGE DOWN  
OFF  
(5) ASPECT button ( 17)  
FREEZE  
MY BUTTON  
KEYSTONE  
1
2
(6) AUTO button ( 19)  
POSITION  
MENU  
(7) BLANK button ( 21)  
ENTER  
(8) MAGNIFY - ON button ( 20)  
ESC  
RESET  
(9) MAGNIFY - OFF button ( 14, 20)  
(24)  
(10) HOME button ( 14)  
(11) END button ( 14)  
(12) PAGE UP button ( 14)  
Back of  
the remote control  
(13) PAGE DOWN button ( 14)  
(14) VOLUME button ( 16)  
(15) MUTE button ( 14, 16)  
(16) FREEZE button ( 21)  
(17) MY BUTTON - 1 button ( 42)  
(18) MY BUTTON - 2 button ( 42)  
(19) KEYSTONE button ( 20)  
(20) POSITION button ( 19, 22)  
(26)  
(21) MENU button ( 22)  
(22) ▲/▼/◄/► cursor buttons ( 14, 22, 23)  
(23) ENTER button ( 14, 22, 23)  
(24) ESC button ( 14, 22)  
(25) RESET button ( 14, 22, 23)  
(26) Battery cover ( 13)  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting up  
Setting up  
Install the projector according to the environment and manner the projector will be  
used in.  
Arrangement  
Refer to the illustrations and tables below to determine screen size and projection distance.  
8755G-RJ  
The values shown in the table are calculated for a full size screen: 1024×768  
a
b
Screen size (diagonal)  
Projection distance (±10%)  
c1 c2  
,
Screen height (±10%)  
On a horizontal surface  
Suspended from the ceiling  
• Keep a space of 30 cm or more  
between the sides of the projector  
and other objects such as walls.  
• Consult with your dealer before  
a special installation such as  
suspending from a ceiling.  
4 : 3 screen  
16 : 9 screen  
a
b
b
c1  
c2  
c1  
Screen  
height  
c2  
Screen size  
(diagonal)  
Projection distance  
Projection distance  
Screen  
height  
Screen  
Screen  
height  
height  
min.  
inch  
max.  
min.  
inch  
max.  
inch  
m
m
m
inch cm inch cm inch  
m
m
inch cm inch cm inch  
30 0.8 0.9 34 1.1 41  
40 1.0 1.2 46 1.4 56  
50 1.3 1.5 58 1.8 70  
60 1.5 1.8 70 2.1 84  
70 1.8 2.1 81 2.5 98  
41  
55  
69  
82  
96  
16  
22  
27  
32  
38  
5
2
2
3
4
4
5
5
6
7
9
1.0 38 1.1 45  
1.3 50 1.5 61  
1.6 63 1.9 76  
1.9 76 2.3 91  
39  
51  
64  
77  
15  
20  
25  
30  
35  
-1  
-2  
-2  
-2  
-3  
-3  
-4  
-4  
-5  
-6  
0
6
-1  
-1  
-1  
-1  
-1  
-1  
-2  
-2  
-2  
-3  
-4  
-5  
8
9
11  
12  
14  
15  
18  
23  
2.3 89 2.7 107 90  
80 2.0 2.4 93 2.8 112 110 43  
90 2.3 2.7 105 3.2 126 123 49  
100 2.5 3.0 117 3.6 140 137 54  
120 3.0 3.6 140 4.3 169 165 65  
150 3.8 4.5 176 5.4 211 206 81  
2.6 102 3.1 122 103 41  
2.9 115 3.5 138 116 46  
3.2 127 3.9 153 129 51  
3.9 153 4.7 184 154 61  
4.9 192 5.8 230 193 76  
200 5.1 6.0 235 7.2 282 274 108 30  
250 6.4 7.5 294 9.0 353 343 135 38  
300 7.6 9.0 352 10.8 423 411 162 46  
12 6.5 256 7.8 307 257 101 -8  
15 8.1 320 9.8 384 322 127 -10  
18 9.8 384 11.7 461 386 152 -12  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting up  
Arrangement (continued)  
8912-RJ  
The values shown in the table are calculated for a full size screen: 1024×768  
a
b
Screen size (diagonal)  
Projection distance (±10%)  
c1 c2  
,
Screen height (±10%)  
On a horizontal surface  
Suspended from the ceiling  
• Keep a space of 30 cm or more  
between the sides of the projector  
and other objects such as walls.  
• Consult with your dealer before  
a special installation such as  
suspending from a ceiling.  
4 : 3 screen  
16 : 9 screen  
a
b
b
c1  
c2  
c1  
Screen  
height  
c2  
Screen size  
(diagonal)  
Projection distance  
Projection distance  
Screen  
height  
Screen  
Screen  
height  
height  
min.  
inch  
max.  
min.  
inch  
max.  
inch  
m
m
m
inch cm inch cm inch  
m
m
inch cm inch cm inch  
30 0.8 0.9 35 1.1 43  
40 1.0 1.2 47 1.4 57  
50 1.3 1.5 59 1.8 71  
60 1.5 1.8 71 2.2 86  
41  
55  
69  
82  
16  
22  
27  
32  
38  
5
2
2
3
4
4
5
5
6
7
9
1.0 39 1.2 47  
1.3 52 1.6 62  
1.6 65 2.0 78  
2.0 78 2.4 94  
39  
51  
64  
77  
15  
20  
25  
30  
35  
-1  
-2  
-2  
-2  
-3  
-3  
-4  
-4  
-5  
-6  
0
6
-1  
-1  
-1  
-1  
-1  
-1  
-2  
-2  
-2  
-3  
-4  
-5  
8
9
70 1.8 2.1 83 2.5 100 96  
11  
12  
14  
15  
18  
23  
2.3 91 2.8 109 90  
80 2.0 2.4 95 2.9 115 110 43  
90 2.3 2.7 107 3.3 129 123 49  
100 2.5 3.0 119 3.6 144 137 54  
120 3.0 3.6 143 4.4 172 165 65  
150 3.8 4.6 179 5.5 216 206 81  
2.6 104 3.2 125 103 41  
3.0 117 3.6 141 116 46  
3.3 130 4.0 156 129 51  
4.0 156 4.8 188 154 61  
4.9 195 6.0 235 193 76  
200 5.1 6.1 239 7.3 288 274 108 30  
250 6.4 7.6 299 9.1 360 343 135 38  
300 7.6 9.1 359 11.0 432 411 162 46  
12 6.6 261 8.0 314 257 101 -8  
15 8.3 326 10.0 392 322 127 -10  
18 9.9 391 12.0 471 386 152 -12  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting up  
WARNING ►Place the projector in a stable horizontal position. If the  
projector falls or is knocked over it could cause injury and/or damage to the  
projector. Using a damaged projector could then result in fire and/or electric  
shock.  
• Do not place the projector on an unstable, slanted or vibrational surface such  
as a wobbly or inclined stand.  
• Do not place the projector on its side, front or rear position.  
• Consult with your dealer before a special installation such as suspending  
from a ceiling.  
►Place the projector in a cool place, and ensure that there is sufficient  
ventilation. The high temperature of the projector could cause fire, burns and/  
or malfunction of the projector.  
• Do not stop-up, block or otherwise cover the projector's vents.  
• Keep a space of 30 cm or more between the sides of the projector and other  
objects such as walls.  
• Do not place the projector on metallic thing or anything weak in heat.  
• Do not place the projector on carpet, cushions or bedding.  
• Do not place the projector in direct sunlight or near hot objects such as  
heaters.  
• Do not anything near the projector lens or vents, or on top of the projector.  
• Do not place anything that may be sucked into or stick to the vents on the  
bottom of the projector. This projector has some intake vents also on the  
bottom.  
►Do not place the projector anyplace where it may get wet. Getting the  
projector wet or inserting liquid into the projector could cause fire, electric  
shock and/or malfunction of the projector.  
• Do not place the projector in a bathroom or the outdoors.  
• Do not place anything containing liquid near the projector.  
CAUTION ►Avoid placing the projector in smoky, humid or dusty place.  
Placing the projector in such places could cause fire, electric shock and/or  
malfunction of the projector.  
• Do not place the projector near humidifiers, smoking spaces or a kitchen.  
►Position the projector to prevent light from directly hitting the projector's  
remote sensor.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting up  
Connecting your devices  
Be sure to read the manuals for devices before connecting them to the projector.  
Make sure that all the devices are suitable to be connected with this product, and  
prepare the cables required to connect.  
Please refer to the following illustrations to connect them.  
Monitor  
PC  
LAN  
AUDIO OUT  
RGB OUT  
RGB OUT  
RS-232C  
USB  
AUDIO OUT  
RGB IN  
Speakers  
AUDIO IN  
VCR/DVD  
player  
Y
CB/PB CR/PR  
L
R
L
R
L
R
VIDEO OUT  
S-VIDEO OUT  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
AUDIO OUT  
AUDIO OUT  
AUDIO OUT  
WARNING ►Do not disassemble or modify the projector and accessories.  
►Be careful not to damage the cables, and do not use damaged cables.  
CAUTION ►Turn off all devices and unplug their power cords prior to  
connecting them to projector. Connecting a live device to the projector may  
generate extremely loud noises or other abnormalities that may result in  
malfunction or damage to the device and the projector.  
►Use appropriate accessory or otherwise designed cables. Ask your dealer  
about non-accessory cables which may have to be of a specific length or  
equipped with a core. For cables with a core only at one end, connect the end  
with the core to the projector.  
►Make sure that devices are connected to the correct ports. An incorrect  
connection may result in malfunction or damage to the device and the projector.  
ꢀ0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting up  
Connecting your devices (continued)  
NOTE • Be sure to read the manuals for devices before connecting them to the  
projector, and make sure that all the devices are suitable to be connected with this  
product. Before connecting to a PC, check the signal level, the signal timing, and the  
resolution.  
- Some signal may need an adapter to input this projector.  
- Some PCs have multiple screen display modes that may include some signals which  
are not supported by this projector.  
- Although the projector can display signals with resolution up to UXGA (1600X1200),  
the signal will be converted to the projector’s panel resolution before being displayed.  
The best display performance will be achieved if the resolutions of the input signal and  
the projector panel are identical.  
• While connecting, make sure that the shape of the cable's connector fits the port to  
connect with. And be sure to tighten the screws on connectors with screws.  
• When connecting a laptop PC to the projector, be sure to activate the PC’s external  
RGB output. (Set the laptop PC to CRT display or to simultaneous LCD and CRT  
display.) For details on how this is done, please refer to the instruction manual of the  
corresponding laptop PC.  
• When the picture resolution is changed on a pc depending on an input, automatic  
adjustment function may take some time and may not be completed. In this case,  
you may not be able to see a check box to select “Yes/No” for the new resolution on  
Windows. Then the resolution will go back to the original. It might be recommended to  
use other CRT or LCD monitors to change the resolution.  
• In some cases, this projector may not display a proper picture or display any picture on  
screen. For example, automatic adjustment may not function correctly with some input  
signals. An input signal of composite sync or sync on G may confuse this projector, so  
the projector may not display a proper picture.  
About Plug-and-Play capability  
Plug-and-Play is a system composed of a PC, its operating system and peripheral  
equipment (i.e. display devices). This projector is VESA DDC 2B compatible. Plug-and-  
Play can be used by connecting this projector to a pc that is VESA DDC (display data  
channel) compatible.  
Take advantage of this feature by connecting an RGB cable to the COMPUTER IN1  
port (DDC 2B compatible). Plug-and-Play may not work properly if any other type of  
connection is attempted.  
• Please use the standard drivers in your pc as this projector is a Plug-and-Play monitor.  
ꢀꢀ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting up  
Connecting power supply  
At first, make sure that the power switch of the  
projector is set to OFF position (marked "O").  
Put the connector of the power cord into the  
AC inlet of the projector.  
1.  
Firmly plug the power cord’s plug into the  
outlet.  
2.  
AC inlet  
Power cord  
WARNING ►Please use extra caution when connecting the power cord, as  
incorrect or faulty connections may result in fire and/or electrical shock.  
• Only use the power cord that came with the projector. If it is damaged, contact  
your dealer to newly get correct one.  
• Only plug the power cord into an outlet rated for use with the power cord's  
specified voltage range. The power outlet should be close to the projector and  
easily accessible. Remove the power cord for complete separation.  
• Never modify the power cord.  
Using the security bar and slot  
Security slot  
A commercial anti-theft chain or wire up to  
10 mm in diameter can be attached to the  
security bar on the projector.  
Also this product has the security slot for the  
Kensington lock.  
For details, see the manual of the security  
tool.  
Anti-theft chain or wire  
Security bar  
WARNING ►Do not use the security bar and slot to prevent the projector  
from falling down, since it is not designed for it.  
CAUTION ►Do not place anti-theft chain or wire near the exhaust vents. It  
may become too hot.  
NOTE • The security bar and slot is not comprehensive theft prevention  
measures. It is intended to be used as supplemental theft prevention measure.  
ꢀꢁ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote control  
Remote control  
Putting batteries  
Please set the batteries to the remote control before using it. If the remote control starts  
to malfunction, try to replace the batteries. If you will not use the remote control for long  
period, remove the batteries from the remote control and store them in a safe place.  
Holding the hook part of the battery  
cover, remove it.  
1.  
Align and insert the two AA batteries  
according to their plus and minus terminals  
as indicated in the remote control.  
2.  
3. Replace the battery cover in the direction of the arrow and snap it back into place.  
WARNING ►Always handle the batteries with care and use them only as  
directed. Improper use may result in battery explosion, cracking or leakage,  
which could result in fire, injury and/or pollution of the surrounding environment.  
• Be sure to use only the batteries specified. Do not use batteries of different  
types at the same time. Do not mix a new battery with used one.  
Make sure the plus and minus terminals are correctly aligned when loading a battery.  
• Keep a battery away from children and pets.  
• Do not recharge, short circuit, solder or disassemble a battery.  
Do not allow a battery in a fire or water. Keep batteries in a dark, cool and dry place.  
If you observe battery leakage, wipe out the leakage and then replace a battery. If the  
leakage adheres to your body or clothes, rinse well with water immediately.  
• Obey the local laws on disposing the battery.  
About the remote control signal  
The remote control works with the projector’s  
Approx.  
remote sensor. This projector has a remote sensor  
3 m  
on the front.  
30º  
The sensor senses the signal within the following  
range when the sensor is active:  
30º  
60 degrees (30 degrees to the left and right of the  
sensor) within 3 meters about.  
NOTE • The remote control signal reflected in the screen or the like may  
be available. If it is difficult to send the signal to the sensor directly, attempt to  
make the signal reflect.  
• The remote control uses infrared light to send signals to the projector (Class 1 LED),  
so be sure to use the remote control in an area free from obstacles that could block  
the remote control’s signal to the projector.  
The remote control may not work correctly if strong light (such as direct sun light) or light  
from an extremely close range (such as from an inverter fluorescent lamp) shines on the  
remote sensor of the projector. Adjust the position of projector avoiding those lights.  
ꢀ3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote control  
Changing the frequency of remote control signal  
The accessory remote control has the two choices on signal  
VIDEO COMPUTER SEARCH  
frequency Mode 1:NORMAL and Mode 2:HIGH. If the remote  
control does not function properly, attempt to change the signal  
frequency.  
ASPECT  
AUTO  
BLANK  
MAGNIFY  
HOME  
END  
PAGE UP  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
ON  
PAGE DOWN  
OFF  
In order to set the Mode, please keep pressing the combination of  
two buttons listed below simultaneously for about 3 seconds.  
(1) Set to Mode 1:NORMAL... MUTE and RESET buttons  
(2) Set to Mode 2:HIGH... MAGNIFY OFF and ESC buttons  
Please remember that the REMOTE FREQ. in the SERVICE  
FREEZE  
MY BUTTON  
KEYSTONE  
1
2
(2)  
(1)  
POSITION  
MENU  
ENTER  
ESC  
RESET  
item of the OPTION menu ( 44) of the projector to be controlled  
should be set to the same mode as the remote control.  
Using as a simple PC mouse & keyboard  
The enclosed remote control works as a simple mouse and  
keyboard of the PC, when the projector's USB port (B type)  
connects with the PC's USB port (A type) port via a mouse cable.  
USB port  
(1) HOME key: Press HOME button.  
(2) END key: Press END button.  
(3) PAGE UP key: Press PAGE UP button.  
(4) PAGE DOWN key: Press PAGE DOWN button.  
(5) Mouse left button: Press ENTER button.  
(6) Move pointer: Use the cursor buttons ▲, ▼, ◄ and ►.  
(7) ESC key: Press ESC button.  
USB  
VIDEO COMPUTER SEARCH  
ASPECT  
AUTO  
BLANK  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(4)  
MAGNIFY  
HOME  
END  
PAGE UP  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
ON  
PAGE DOWN  
OFF  
(8) Mouse right button: Press RESET button.  
FREEZE  
MY BUTTON  
KEYSTONE  
1
2
CAUTION ►Improper use of the simple mouse  
& keyboard function could damage your equipment.  
While using this function, please connect this product  
only to a PC. Be sure to check your PC’s manuals  
before connecting this product to the PC.  
POSITION  
MENU  
(5)  
(7)  
(6)  
(8)  
ENTER  
ESC  
RESET  
NOTE When the simple mouse & keyboard function of this product does not work  
correctly, please check the following.  
- When the mouse cable connects this projector with a PC having a built-in pointing  
device (e.g. track ball) like a notebook PC, open BIOS setup menu, then select the  
external mouse and disable the built-in pointing device, because the built-in pointing  
device may have priority to this function.  
- Windows 95 OSR 2.1 or higher is required for this function. And also this function may  
not work depending on the PC’s configurations and mouse drivers.  
- You cannot do things like press two buttons at once (for instance, pressing two buttons  
at the same time to move the mouse pointer diagonally).  
- This function is activated only when the projector is working properly. This function is  
not available while the lamp is warming up (the POWER indicator blinks green), and  
while adjusting the volume and display, correcting for keystone, zooming in on the  
screen, using the BLANK function, or displaying the menu screen.  
ꢀ4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Power on/off  
Power on/off  
STANDBY/ON button  
POWER indicator  
Turning on the power  
Make sure that the power cord is firmly and correctly  
1. connected to the projector and the outlet.  
Remove the lens cover, and set the power switch to  
2. ON position (marked “ I “).  
The POWER indicator will light up in steady orange  
(
60). Then wait several seconds because the  
VIDEO COMPUTER SEARCH  
ASPECT  
AUTO  
BLANK  
buttons may not function for these several seconds.  
MAGNIFY  
HOME  
END  
PAGE UP  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
ON  
PAGE DOWN  
OFF  
Press STANDBY/ON button on the projector or the  
FREEZE  
MY BUTTON  
KEYSTONE  
1
2
3. remote control.  
POSITION  
MENU  
ENTER  
The projection lamp will light up and POWER indicator  
will begin blinking in green. When the power is  
ESC  
RESET  
completely on, the indicator will stop blinking and light  
in steady green ( 60).  
Power switch  
To display the picture, select an input signal according to the section “Selecting an input  
signal” ( 16).  
Turning off the power  
Press the STANDBY/ON button on the projector or the remote control. The message  
1. “Power off?” will appear on the screen for about 5 seconds.  
Press the STANDBY/ON button again while the message appears.  
2. The projector lamp will go off, and the POWER indicator will begin blinking in orange.  
Then POWER indicator will stop blinking and light in steady orange when the lamp  
cooling is complete( 60).  
Make sure that POWER indicator lights in steady orange, and set the  
3. power switch to OFF position (marked “O“).  
POWER indicator will go off. Attach the lens cover.  
Power switch  
Do not turn the projector on for about 10 minutes or more after turning it off. Turning  
the projector on again too soon could shorten the lifetime of some consumable parts of the projector.  
WARNING ►A strong light is emitted when the projector’s power is on. Do  
not look into the lens of the projector or look inside of the projector through any  
of the projector’s openings.  
►Do not touch around the lamp cover and the exhaust vents during use or just  
after use, since it is too hot.  
NOTE Turn the power on/off in right order. Please power on the projector prior  
to the connected devices. Power off the projector after all of connected devices are  
powered off.  
The projector has the AUTO ON function, which can make the projector automatically  
turn on. For more information, please see AUTO ON item of OPTION menu 40).  
(
Use the shutdown switch ( 61) only when the projector is not turned off by  
normal procedure.  
ꢀ5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating  
Operating  
VOLUME button  
Adjusting the volume  
VIDEO COMPUTER SEARCH  
BLANK  
ASPECT  
AUTO  
Press VOLUME button on the remote control.  
1.  
MAGNIFY  
HOME  
END  
PAGE UP  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
A dialog will appear on the screen to aid you in adjusting the  
ON  
PAGE DOWN  
volume.  
OFF  
FREEZE  
MY BUTTON  
KEYSTONE  
1
2
Use the ▲/▼ cursor buttons to adjust the volume.  
2.  
To close the dialog and complete the operation, press the  
VOLUME button again. Even if you do not do anything, the  
dialog will automatically disappear after a few seconds.  
POSITION  
MENU  
ENTER  
ESC  
RESET  
● When is selected for current picture input port, the volume  
adjustment is disable. Please see AUDIO item of SETUP menu  
(
35)  
.
▲/▼ button  
Temporarily muting the sound  
MUTE button  
Press MUTE button on the remote control.  
1.  
A dialog will appear on the screen indicating that you have muted the sound.  
VIDEO COMPUTER SEARCH  
BLANK  
ASPECT  
AUTO  
To restore the sound, press the MUTE or VOLUME button. Even  
if you do not do anything, the dialog will automatically disappear  
after a few seconds.  
MAGNIFY  
HOME  
END  
PAGE UP  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
ON  
PAGE DOWN  
OFF  
FREEZE  
MY BUTTON  
KEYSTONE  
● When is selected for current picture input port, the sound is  
1
2
(
35)  
always muted. Please see AUDIO item of SETUP menu  
.
POSITION  
MENU  
Selecting an input signal  
INPUT button  
Press INPUT button on the projector.  
1.  
Each time you press the button, the projector switches  
its input port from the current port as below.  
COMPUTER IN 1  
COMPUTER IN 2  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
COMPONENT (Y, Cb/Pb, Cr/Pr)  
● While TURN ON is selected for AUTO SEARCH item in  
40  
OPTION menu (  
), the projector will keep checking the  
ports in above order repeatedly till an input signal is detected.  
Press COMPUTER button on the remote control.  
Each time you press the button, the projector switches  
its input port from the current port as below.  
1.  
COMPUTER button  
VIDEO COMPUTER SEARCH  
COMPUTER IN 1  
COMPUTER IN 2  
BLANK  
ASPECT  
AUTO  
MAGNIFY  
HOME  
END  
PAGE UP  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
ON  
While TURN ON is selected for AUTO SEARCH item in OPTION  
menu, the projector will keep checking every port sequentially till  
PAGE DOWN  
OFF  
FREEZE  
MY BUTTON  
KEYSTONE  
1
2
40  
an input signal is detected  
(
). If COMPUTER button is pushed  
when VIDEO, S-VIDEO or COMPONENT port is selected, the  
projector will check COMPUTER IN1 port first.  
POSITION  
MENU  
(continued on next page)  
ꢀ6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating  
Selecting an input signal (continued)  
VIDEO button  
Press VIDEO button on the remote control.  
Each time you press the button, the projector switches its input  
port from the current port as below.  
1.  
VIDEO COMPUTER SEARCH  
BLANK  
ASPECT  
AUTO  
MAGNIFY  
HOME  
END  
PAGE UP  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
ON  
COMPONENT(Y, Cb/Pb, Cr/Pr) S-VIDEO VIDEO  
PAGE DOWN  
OFF  
FREEZE  
MY BUTTON  
KEYSTONE  
1
2
● While TURN ON is selected for AUTO SEARCH item in OPTION  
menu, the projector will keep checking every port sequentially till  
POSITION  
MENU  
(
40)  
an input signal is detected  
. If COMPUTER button is pushed  
when VIDEO, S-VIDEO or COMPONENT port is selected, the projector will  
check COMPUTER IN1 port first.  
Searching an input signal  
SEARCH button  
Press SEARCH button on the remote control.  
1.  
The projector will start to check its input ports as below  
in order to find any input signals.  
VIDEO COMPUTER SEARCH  
BLANK  
ASPECT  
AUTO  
MAGNIFY  
HOME  
END  
PAGE UP  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
When an input is found, the projector will stop searching and  
display the image. If no signal is found, the projector will return to  
the state selected before the operation.  
ON  
PAGE DOWN  
OFF  
FREEZE  
MY BUTTON  
KEYSTONE  
1
2
COMPUTER IN 1  
COMPUTER IN 2  
POSITION  
MENU  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
COMPONENT (Y, Cb/Pb, Cr/Pr)  
● While TURN ON is selected for AUTO SEARCH item in OPTION  
40  
menu (  
), the projector will keep checking the ports in above order  
repeatedly till an input signal is detected.  
Selecting an aspect ratio  
ASPECT button  
Press ASPECT button on the remote control.  
1.  
Each time you press the button, the projector switches the  
mode for aspect ratio in turn.  
VIDEO COMPUTER SEARCH  
BLANK  
ASPECT  
AUTO  
For a computer signal  
MAGNIFY  
HOME  
END  
PAGE UP  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
ON  
NORMAL 4:3  
ꢀ6:9  
SMALL  
PAGE DOWN  
OFF  
FREEZE  
MY BUTTON  
KEYSTONE  
1
2
For a video signal, s-video signal or component video  
signal  
4:3  
POSITION  
MENU  
ꢀ6:9  
ꢀ4:9  
SMALL  
For no signal  
4:3 (fixed)  
● ASPECT button does not work when no proper signal is inputted.  
● NORMAL mode keeps the original aspect ratio setting.  
ꢀ7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating  
Adjusting the projector's elevator  
When the place to put the projector is slightly uneven to the left or right, use the  
elevator feet to place the projector horizontally.  
Using the feet can also tilt the projector in order to project at  
a suitable angle to the screen, elevating the front side of the  
projector within 10 degrees.  
This projector has 2 elevator feet and 2 elevator buttons. An elevator foot is  
adjustable while pushing the elevator button on the same side as it.  
1. Holding the projector, push the elevator buttons to loose the elevator feet.  
2. Position the front side of the projector to the desired height.  
3. Release the elevator buttons in order to lock the elevator feet.  
4. After making sure that the elevator feet are locked, put the projector gently.  
If necessary, the elevator feet can be manually twisted to make more precise  
adjustments. Hold the projector when twisting the feet.  
5.  
To loose an elevator foot, push the  
To nely adjust, twist the foot.  
elevator button on the same side as it.  
CAUTION ►Do not handle the elevator buttons without holding the  
projector, since the projector may drop down.  
►Do not tilt the projector other than it elevating its front within 10 degrees using  
the adjuster feet. A tilt of the projector exceeding the restriction could cause  
malfunction or shortening the lifetime of consumables, or the projector itself.  
Adjusting the zoom and focus  
1. Use the zoom ring to adjust the screen size.  
Zoom ring  
Focus ring  
2. Use the focus ring to focus the picture.  
ꢀ8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating  
Using the automatic adjustment feature  
AUTO button  
Press AUTO button on the remote control.  
1.  
Pressing this button performs the following.  
VIDEO COMPUTER SEARCH  
For a computer signal  
BLANK  
ASPECT  
AUTO  
The vertical position, the horizontal position and the horizontal  
phase will be automatically adjusted. And the horizontal size  
will be automatically set to the default.  
MAGNIFY  
HOME  
END  
PAGE UP  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
ON  
PAGE DOWN  
OFF  
FREEZE  
MY BUTTON  
KEYSTONE  
1
2
Make sure that the application window is set to its maximum  
size prior to attempting to use this feature. A dark picture may  
still be incorrectly adjusted. Use a bright picture when adjusting.  
POSITION  
MENU  
For a video signal, s-video signal or component video signal  
The video format best suited for the respective input signal will be selected  
automatically. This function is available only when AUTO is selected for  
(
32)  
VIDEO FORMAT item in INPUT menu  
.
The vertical position and horizontal position will be automatically set to the  
default. For a component video signal, also the horizontal phase will be  
automatically set to the default.  
● The automatic adjustment operation requires approx. 10 seconds. Also  
please note that it may not function correctly with some input. When this  
function is performed for a video signal, a certain extra such as a line may  
appear outside a picture.  
The items adjusted by this function may vary when FINE or DISABLE is  
(
43)  
.
selected for AUTO ADJUST item of SERVICE item in OPTION menu  
Adjusting the position  
FREEZE  
MY BUTTON  
KEYSTONE  
1
2
Press POSITION button on the remote control when no menu  
1.  
is indicated.  
POSITION  
MENU  
The “POSITION” indication will appear on the screen.  
ENTER  
2. Use the ▲/▼/◄/► cursor buttons to adjust the picture position.  
ESC  
RESET  
When you want to reset the operation, press RESET button on  
the remote control during the operation.  
To complete this operation, press POSITION button again. Even  
if you do not do anything, the dialog will automatically disappear  
after a few seconds.  
POSITION button  
● When this function is performed on a video signal, s-video signal or component  
video signal, some image such as an extra-line may appear at outside of the  
picture.  
● When this function is performed on a video signal, s-video signal or component  
video signal, the range of this adjustment depends on OVER SCAN in IMAGE  
(
29)  
setting. It is not possible to adjust when OVER SCAN is set to 10.  
menu  
● If POSITION button is pressed when a menu is indicated on screen, the  
displayed picture does not move its position but the menu does.  
ꢀ9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating  
KEYSTONE button  
Correcting the keystone distortions  
Press KEYSTONE button on the remote control. A dialog will  
1.  
VIDEO COMPUTER SEARCH  
appear on the screen to aid you in correcting the distortion.  
BLANK  
ASPECT  
AUTO  
Use the ▲/▼ cursor buttons to select AUTO or MANUAL  
operation, and press the ► button to perform the following.  
MAGNIFY  
HOME  
END  
PAGE UP  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
ON  
2.  
PAGE DOWN  
OFF  
FREEZE  
MY BUTTON  
KEYSTONE  
(1) AUTO executes automatic vertical keystone correction.  
1
2
(2) MANUAL displays a dialog for keystone correction.  
Use the ▲/▼ buttons for adjustment.  
POSITION  
MENU  
To close the dialog and complete this operation, press KEYSTONE button again. Even if  
you do not do anything, the dialog will automatically disappear after a few seconds.  
● The adjustable range of this correction will vary among inputs. For some input,  
this function may not work well.  
When V:INVERT or H&V:INVERT is selected for MIRROR item in SETUP menu, if the  
projector screen is inclined or angled downward, this function may not work correctly.  
● When the zoom adjustment is set to TELE (telephoto focus), the automatic keystone  
distortion correction may be excessive. This function should be used when the zoom  
adjustment is set to the full WIDE (wide-angle focus) whenever possible.  
● When the projector is placed on the level (about ±0°), the automatic keystone  
distortion correction may not work.  
● When the projector is inclined to near ±30 degree or over, this function may not work well.  
● This function will be unavailable when Transition Detector is on ( 49).  
Using the magnify feature  
MAGNIFY  
Press the ON button of MAGNIFY on the remote control.  
1.  
ON/OFF button  
The “MAGNIFY” indication will appear on the screen and the  
projector will go into the MAGNIFY mode. When the ON button  
of MAGNIFY is pressed first after the projector is started, the  
picture will be zoomed twice. The indication will disappear in  
several seconds with no operation.  
VIDEO COMPUTER SEARCH  
BLANK  
ASPECT  
AUTO  
MAGNIFY  
HOME  
END  
PAGE UP  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
ON  
PAGE DOWN  
OFF  
Use the ▲/▼ cursor buttons to adjust the zoom level. The picture of  
FREEZE  
MY BUTTON  
KEYSTONE  
2.  
1
2
video, s-video or component video signal can be zoomed in up to 2  
times, and the one of computer signal can be zoomed in up to 4 times.  
To move the zoom area, press POSITION button in the MAGNIFY  
POSITION  
MENU  
mode, then use the ▲/▼/◄/► cursor buttons to move the area. And to finalize the  
zoom area, press POSITION button again.  
To exit from the MAGNIFY mode and restore the screen to normal, press the  
OFF button of MAGNIFY on the remote control.  
● The projector automatically exits from the MAGNIFY mode when the input  
signal is changed or when the display condition is changed.  
● In the MAGNIFY mode, the keystone distortion condition may vary, it will be  
restored when the projector exits from the MAGNIFY mode.  
NOTE The zoom level can be finely adjusted. Closely watch the screen to  
find the level you want.  
ꢁ0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating  
Freezing the screen  
FREEZE button  
Press FREEZE button on the remote control.  
1.  
The “FREEZE” indication will appear on the screen (however,  
the indication will not appear when TURN OFF is selected for  
VIDEO COMPUTER SEARCH  
BLANK  
ASPECT  
AUTO  
(
39)  
MESSAGE item in SCREEN menu  
), and the projector will  
MAGNIFY  
HOME  
END  
PAGE UP  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
ON  
go into the FREEZE mode, which the picture is frozen.  
To exit the FREEZE mode and restore the screen to normal,  
press FREEZE button again.  
PAGE DOWN  
OFF  
FREEZE  
MY BUTTON  
KEYSTONE  
1
2
POSITION  
MENU  
● The projector automatically exits from the FREEZE mode when  
one of the projector’s buttons or remote control buttons of  
STANDBY/ON, SEARCH, COMPUTER, VIDEO, BLANK, AUTO, VOLUME,  
MUTE, KEYSTONE, MENU, MAGNIFY and MY BUTTON1/2(except  
(
42)  
is pressed.  
MY MEMORY or PICTURE MODE is assigned to)  
● If the projector continues projecting a still image for a long time, the LCD panel  
might possibly be burned in. Do not leave the projector in the FREEZE mode  
for too long.  
Temporarily blanking the screen  
BLANK button  
Press BLANK button on the remote control.  
1.  
The BLANK screen will be displayed instead of the screen  
of input signal. Please refer to BLANK item in SCREEN menu  
VIDEO COMPUTER SEARCH  
BLANK  
ASPECT  
AUTO  
(
36).  
MAGNIFY  
HOME  
END  
PAGE UP  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
ON  
To exit from the BLANK screen and return to the input signal  
screen, press BLANK button again.  
PAGE DOWN  
OFF  
FREEZE  
MY BUTTON  
KEYSTONE  
1
2
● The projector automatically returns to the input signal screen  
when one of the projector’s buttons or the remote control buttons  
(except ASPECT, POSITION, MAGNIFY or FREEZE button, also  
POSITION  
MENU  
except MY BUTTON1/2 if AUTO KEYSTONE  
EXECUTE or MY MEMORY or  
42)  
) is pressed.  
(
PICTURE MODE is assigned to  
NOTE The sound is not connected with the BLANK screen function.  
If necessary, set the volume or mute first.  
ꢁꢀ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating  
Using the menu function  
This projector has the following menus:  
PICTURE, IMAGE, INPUT, SETUP, SCREEN, OPTION, NETWORK and EASY  
MENU.  
EASY MENU consists of functions often used, and the other menus are classified  
into each purpose and brought together as Advanced Menu.  
Each of these menus is operated using the same methods. The basic operations  
of these menus are as follows.  
MENU button  
ENTER button  
MENU button  
Cursor buttons  
POSITION  
MENU  
ENTER  
ESC  
RESET  
ESC button  
RESET button  
COMPUTER  
Y
F
I
N
G
A
M
Press the MENU button on the remote control or the projector.  
The Advanced Menu or EASY MENU, which has priority just after powered  
on will appear.  
1.  
If you want to move the menu position, use the cursor buttons after pressing the  
POSITION button. While the projector is displaying any menu, MENU button on  
the projector works as the cursor buttons.  
In the EASY MENU  
If you want to change it to the Advanced Menu,  
select the Go to Advanced Menu...  
2.  
Use the ▲/▼ cursor buttons to select an item to  
operate.  
3.  
4. Use the ◄/► cursor buttons to operate the item.  
EASY MENU  
(continued on next page)  
ꢁꢁ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating  
Using the menu function (continued)  
In the Advanced Menu  
Use the ▲/▼ cursor buttons to select a menu.  
2.  
If you want to change it to the EASY MENU, select  
EASY MENU.  
Then press the ► cursor button, or ENTER button to  
select an item. The lower layer menu of the selected item  
will appear.  
Advanced Menu  
Use the ▲/▼ cursor buttons to select an item to  
operate.  
Then press the ► cursor button, or ENTER button to progress. The operation  
menu of the selected item will appear.  
3.  
4. Use the ▲/▼ cursor buttons to operate the item.  
● Some functions cannot be performed when a certain input port is selected, or  
when a certain input signal is displayed.  
● When you want to reset the operation, press RESET button on the remote  
control during the operation. Note that some items (ex. LANGUAGE, H  
PHASE, VOLUME) cannot be reset.  
● In the Advanced Menu, when you want to return to the previous display, press  
the ◄ cursor button or ESC button on the remote control.  
Press MENU button on the remote control again to close the menu and  
complete this operation. Even if you do not do anything, the dialog will  
automatically disappear after about 10 seconds.  
5.  
ꢁ3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EASY MENU  
EASY MENU  
From the EASY MENU, items shown in the table below can  
be performed.  
Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons. Then perform  
it according to the following table.  
Item  
Description  
Using the ◄/► buttons switches the mode for aspect ratio.  
ASPECT  
See the ASPECT item in IMAGE menu ( 29).  
AUTO  
KEYSTONE  
EXECUTE  
Using the ► button executes the auto keystone function.  
See AUTO KEYSTONE  
EXECUTE item in SETUP menu  
(
34).  
Using the ◄/► buttons corrects the vertical keystone distortion.  
See KEYSTONE item in SETUP menu ( 34).  
KEYSTONE  
Using the ◄/► buttons switches the picture mode.  
The picture modes are combinations of GAMMA and COLOR  
TEMP settings. Choose a suitable mode according to the projected  
source.  
NORMAL  
CINEMA  
DYNAMIC  
BOARD(BLACK)  
ó
ó
ó
DAYTIME  
WHITEBOARD  
COLOR TEMP  
BOARD(GREEN)  
GAMMA  
ó
ó
NORMAL  
CINEMA  
DYNAMIC  
#2 MID DEFAULT  
#3 LOW DEFAULT  
#1 HIGH DEFAULT  
#1 DEFAULT  
#2 DEFAULT  
#3 DEFAULT  
PICTURE MODE  
BOARD(BLACK)  
BOARD(GREEN)  
WHITEBOARD  
DAYTIME  
#4 Hi-BRIGHT-1 DEFAULT #4 DEFAULT  
#5 Hi-BRIGHT-2 DEFAULT #4 DEFAULT  
#2 MID DEFAULT  
#5 DEFAULT  
#6 Hi-BRIGHT-3 DEFAULT #6 DEFAULT  
When the combination of GAMMA and COLOR TEMP differs  
from pre-assigned modes above, the display on the menu for the  
PICTURE MODE is “CUSTOM”. Please refer to GAMMA ( 26) and  
COLOR TEMP ( 26) items in PICTURE menu.  
When this function is performed, a certain extra such as a line  
may appear.  
(continued on next page)  
ꢁ4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EASY MENU  
EASY MENU (continued)  
Item  
Description  
Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the brightness.  
BRIGHTNESS  
CONTRAST  
COLOR  
See BRIGHTNESS item in PICTURE menu ( 26).  
Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the contrast.  
See CONTRAST item in PICTURE menu  
(
26).  
Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the strength of whole color.  
See COLOR item in PICTURE menu ( 26).  
Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the tint.  
TINT  
See TINT item in PICTURE menu ( 26).  
Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the sharpness.  
SHARPNESS  
WHISPER  
MIRROR  
See SHARPNESS item in PICTURE menu  
(
27).  
Using the ◄/► buttons turns off/on the whisper mode.  
See WHISPER item in SETUP menu ( 35).  
Using the ◄/► buttons switches the mode for mirror status.  
See MIRROR item in SETUP menu ( 35).  
Performing this item resets all of EASY MENU items except FILTER  
TIME and LANGUAGE.  
A dialog is displayed for confirmation. Selecting RESET using the  
▲ button performs resetting.  
RESET  
Performing this item resets the filter time which counts usage time  
of the air filter.  
A dialog is displayed for confirmation. Selecting RESET using the  
▲ button performs resetting.  
FILTER TIME  
LANGUAGE  
See FILTER TIME item in OPTION menu ( 41).  
Using the ◄/► buttons changes the display language.  
See LANGUAGE item in SCREEN menu  
(
36).  
Select Go to Advanced Menu… on the menu, and press the  
or ENTER button to use the menu of PICTURE, IMAGE, INPUT,  
SETUP, SCREEN, OPTION or NETWORK.  
Go to  
Advanced Menu...  
ꢁ5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PICTURE menu  
PICTURE menu  
From the PICTURE menu, items shown in the table below  
can be performed.  
Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons, and press the  
► cursor button or ENTER button to execute the item. Then  
perform it according to the following table.  
Item  
Description  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons adjusts the brightness.  
BRIGHTNESS  
Light  
Dark  
ó
Using the ▲/▼ buttons adjusts the contrast.  
Strong Weak  
CONTRAST  
ó
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the gamma mode.  
#1 DEFAULT #1 CUSTOM #2 DEFAULT #2 CUSTOM  
#3 DEFAULT  
#6 CUSTOM  
#3 CUSTOM  
#6 DEFAULT  
GAMMA  
#5 CUSTOM #5 DEFAULT #4 CUSTOM #4 DEFAULT  
To adjust the "CUSTOM" modes, see "To adjust CUSTOM function  
in GAMMA and COLOR TEMP" ( 28).  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the color temperature mode.  
#1 HIGH DEFAULT #1 HIGH CUSTOM #2 MID DEFAULT  
#2 MID CUSTOM  
#6 Hi-BRIGHT-3 CUSTOM  
#3 LOW DEFAULT  
#6 Hi-BRIGHT-3 DEFAULT  
COLOR TEMP  
#3 LOW CUSTOM  
#5 Hi-BRIGHT-2 CUSTOM  
#5 Hi-BRIGHT-2 DEFAULT  
#4 Hi-BRIGHT-1 CUSTOM  
#4 Hi-BRIGHT-1 DEFAULT  
To adjust the "CUSTOM" modes, see "To adjust CUSTOM function  
in GAMMA and COLOR TEMP" ( 28).  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons adjusts the strength of whole color.  
Strong  
Weak  
ó
COLOR  
TINT  
This item can be selected only for a video signal, s-video or  
component video signal.  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons adjusts the tint.  
Greenish  
Reddish  
ó
This item can be selected only for a video signal, s-video or  
component video signal.  
(continued on next page)  
ꢁ6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PICTURE menu  
PICTURE menu (continued)  
Item  
Description  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons adjusts the sharpness.  
Strong Weak  
ó
SHARPNESS  
There may be some noise and/or the screen may flicker for a  
moment when an adjustment is made. This is not a malfunction.  
This projector has 4 memories for adjustment data (for all the items  
of PICTURE menu).  
Selecting a function using the ▲/▼ buttons and pressing the ► or  
ENTER button performs each function.  
LOAD-1  
LOAD-2  
LOAD-3  
LOAD-4  
ó
ó
ó
SAVE-4 SAVE-3  
SAVE-2  
SAVE-1  
ó
ó
ó
LOAD-1, LOAD-2, LOAD-3, LOAD-4  
Performing a LOAD function loads the data from the memory linked  
in the number included in the function’s name, and adjusts the  
picture automatically depending on the data.  
• The LOAD functions whose linked memory has no data are  
skipped.  
MY MEMORY  
• Remember that the current adjusted condition will be lost by  
loading data. If you want to keep the current adjustment, please  
save it before performing a LOAD function.  
• There may be some noise and the screen may flicker for a  
moment when loading data. This is not malfunction.  
You can perform the LOAD function using MY BUTTONs. Please  
see MY BUTTON item in OPTION menu ( 42).  
SAVE-1, SAVE-2, SAVE-3, SAVE-4  
Performing a SAVE function saves the current adjustment data into  
the memory linked in the number included in the function’s name.  
• Remember that the current data being stored of a memory will be  
lost by saving a new data into the memory.  
ꢁ7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PICTURE menu  
PICTURE menu (continued)  
To adjust CUSTOM function in GAMMA and COLOR TEMP  
Selecting a mode whose name includes  
CUSTOM in GAMMA or COLOR TEMP item  
and then pressing the ► button or ENTER  
button displays a dialog to aid you in adjusting  
the mode.  
Choose an item using the ◄/► buttons, and  
adjust the level using the ▲/▼ buttons.  
• When this function is performed, lines or other  
distortion may appear.  
GAMMA  
COLOR TEMP  
You can display a test pattern on the top of the screen for  
checking the effect of your adjustment by pressing the ENTER  
button. Each time you press the ENTER button, the pattern  
changes as below.  
test pattern  
No pattern Gray scale of 9 steps  
Ramp Gray scale of 15 steps  
You can also adjust each function without displaying test patterns.  
for adjusting GAMMA  
You can change the brightness of particular tones.  
The eight equalizing bars correspond to eight tone levels of the test pattern (Gray scale of  
9 steps) except the darkest in the left end. If you want to adjust the 2nd tone from left end  
on the test pattern, use the equalizing adjustment bar “1”. The darkest tone at the left end  
of the test pattern cannot be controlled with any of equalizing adjustment bar.  
for adjusting COLOR TEMP  
You can change the intensity of each of 3 colors (Red, Green, Blue).  
OFFSET adjustments change the color intensity on the whole tones of the test pattern.  
GAIN adjustments mainly affect color intensity on the brighter tones of the test pattern.  
ꢁ8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IMAGE menu  
IMAGE menu  
From the IMAGE menu, items shown in the table below  
can be performed.  
Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons, and press  
the ► cursor button or ENTER button to execute the item.  
Then perform it according to the following table.  
Item  
Description  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the mode for aspect ratio.  
For a computer signal  
NORMAL  
4:3  
ꢀ6:9  
SMALL  
ó
ó
ó
For a video signal, s-video signal or component video signal  
4:3 ꢀ6:9 ꢀ4:9 SMALL  
ASPECT  
ó
ó
ó
For no signal  
4:3 (fixed)  
• This item can be selected only for a proper signal.  
• NORMAL mode keeps the original aspect ratio setting.  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons adjusts the over-scan ratio.  
Large (It reduces picture)  
This item can be selected only for a video, s-video and component video signal.  
• When this adjustment is too large, certain degradation may appear  
at the frame area of the picture. In such a case, please adjust small.  
Small (It magnifies picture)  
ó
OVER SCAN  
V POSITION  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons adjusts the vertical position.  
Up  
Down  
ó
Over-adjusting the vertical position may cause noise to appear on the  
screen. If this occurs please reset the vertical position to the default setting.  
Pressing RESET button when V POSITION is selected will reset V  
POSITION to the default setting.  
When this function is performed on a video signal, s-video signal, or  
component video signal, the range of this adjustment depends on OVER  
SCAN above) setting. It is not possible to adjust when OVER SCAN is  
(
set to 10.  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons adjusts the horizontal position.  
Left Right  
ó
Over-adjusting the horizontal position may cause noise to appear on the  
screen. If this occurs please reset the horizontal position to the default setting.  
Pressing RESET button when H POSITION is selected will reset H  
POSITION to the default setting.  
H POSITION  
When this function is performed on a video signal, s-video signal, or  
component video signal, the range of this adjustment depends on OVER  
SCAN above) setting. It is not possible to adjust when OVER SCAN is  
(
set to 10.  
(continued on next page)  
ꢁ9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IMAGE menu  
IMAGE menu (continued)  
Item  
Description  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons adjusts the horizontal phase to eliminate flicker.  
Right Left  
ó
H PHASE  
H SIZE  
• This item can be selected only for a computer signal or component  
video signal.  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons adjusts the horizontal size.  
Large  
Small  
ó
This item can be selected only for a computer signal.  
When this adjustment is excessive, the picture may not be  
displayed correctly. In such a case, please reset the adjustment by  
pressing the RESET button during this operation.  
Executing this item performs the automatic adjustment feature.  
For a computer signal  
The vertical position, the horizontal position and the horizontal  
phase ( 43) will be automatically adjusted. And the horizontal size  
will be automatically set to the default.  
Make sure that the application window is set to its maximum size  
prior to attempting to use this feature. A dark picture may still be  
incorrectly adjusted. Use a bright picture when adjusting.  
For a video signal, s-video signal or component video signal  
The video format best suited for the respective input signal will be  
selected automatically.  
AUTO ADJUST  
EXECUTE  
This function is available only when the AUTO mode is selected to  
VIDEO FORMAT item in INPUT menu ( 32).  
The vertical position and horizontal position will be automatically set  
to the the default.  
For a component video signal, also the horizontal phase will be  
automatically set to the default.  
The automatic adjustment operation requires approx. 10 seconds.  
Also please note that it may not function correctly with some input.  
When this function is performed for a video signal, a certain extra  
such as a line may appear outside a picture.  
The items adjusted by this function may vary when FINE or  
DISABLE is selected for AUTO ADJUST item of SERVICE item in  
OPTION menu 43).  
(
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INPUT menu  
INPUT menu  
From the INPUT menu, items shown in the table below can  
be performed.  
Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons, and press  
the ► cursor button or ENTER button to execute the item.  
Then perform it according to the following table.  
Item  
Description  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the progress mode.  
TV FILM TURN OFF  
ó
ó
This function is performed only for an interlaced signal of a video,  
s-video or component video of 525i (480i) or 625i (576i) signal.  
When TV or FILM is selected, the screen image will be sharp.  
FILM adapts to the 2-3 Pull-Down conversion system. But these  
may cause a certain defect (for example, jagged line) of the picture  
for a quick moving object. In such a case, please select TURN OFF,  
even though the screen image may lose the sharpness.  
PROGRESSIVE  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the noise reduction mode.  
HIGH  
MID  
LOW  
ó
ó
VIDEO NR  
COLOR SPACE  
COMPONENT  
This function performs only for a video, s-video or component  
video of 525i(480i) or 625i(576i) signal.  
When this function is excessive, it may cause a certain  
degradation of the picture.  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the mode for color space.  
AUTO  
RGB  
SMPTE240  
REC709  
REC601  
ó
ó
ó
ó
This item can be selected only for a computer signal or component  
video signal except SCART RGB signal.  
The AUTO mode automatically selects the optimum mode.  
The AUTO operation may not work well at some signals. In such a  
case, it might be good to select a suitable mode except AUTO.  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the function of the COMPONENT  
(Y, Cb/Pb, Cr/Pr) port.  
COMPONENT  
SCART RGB  
ó
When the SCART RGB is selected, COMPONENT (Y, Cb/Pb, Cr/  
Pr) and VIDEO ports will function as a SCART RGB port. A SCART  
cable is required for a SCART RGB input to the projector. For your  
reference, see the TECHNICAL part.  
(continued on next page)  
3ꢀ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INPUT menu  
INPUT menu (continued)  
Item  
Description  
The video format for S-VIDEO port and VIDEO port can be set.  
(1) Use the ◄/► buttons to select the input port.  
(2) Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the mode  
for video format.  
AUTO  
NTSC  
PAL  
SECAM  
ó
ó
ó
N-PAL  
M-PAL  
NTSC4.43  
ó
ó
VIDEO FORMAT  
This item is performed only for a video signal  
from VIDEO port or S-VIDEO port.  
The AUTO mode automatically selects the optimum mode.  
The AUTO operation may not work well for some signals. If the  
picture becomes unstable (e.g. an irregular picture, lack of color),  
please select the mode according to the input signal.  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns the frame lock function on/off.  
TURN ON  
TURN OFF  
ó
This item can be performed only on a computer signal with a  
vertical frequency of 50 to 60 Hz.  
When the TURN ON is selected, a moving pictures are displayed  
more smoothly.  
FRAME LOCK  
This function may cause a certain degradation of the picture. In  
such a case, please select TURN OFF.  
The computer input signal type for COMPUTER IN1 and IN2 ports  
can be set.  
(1) Use the ◄/► buttons to select the input  
port to be set.  
COMPUTER (IN)1  
COMPUTER (IN)2  
ó
(2) Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select the  
computer input signal type.  
COMPUTER IN  
SYNC ON G ON  
SYNC ON G OFF  
ó
Selecting SYNC ON G ON allows reception of sync on Green  
signal.  
• When SYNC ON G ON is selected, the picture may be distorted  
with certain input signals. In such a case, remove the signal  
connector first and select SYNC ON G OFF on the menu, and then  
reconnect the signal.  
(continued on next page)  
3ꢁ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INPUT menu  
INPUT menu (continued)  
Item  
Description  
The resolution for the COMPUTER IN1 and IN2 input signals can  
be set on this projector.  
(1) In INPUT menu select RESOLUTION using the ▲/▼ buttons  
and press the ► button.  
The RESOLUTION menu will be displayed.  
(2) In the RESOLUTION menu, select  
the resolution you wish to display using  
the ▲/▼ buttons.  
Selecting AUTO will set a resolution  
appropriate to the input signal.  
(3) STANDARD  
Pressing the ► or ENTER button when  
selecting a STANDARD resolution will  
automatically adjust the horizontal and  
vertical positions, clock phase and  
horizontal size and automatically select  
an aspect ratio.  
STANDARD  
(3) CUSTOM  
(3)-1 To set a custom resolution use the  
▲/▼ buttons to select the CUSTOM  
and the CUSTOM RESOLUTION  
box will be displayed. Set the  
horizontal (HORZ) and vertical  
(VERT) resolutions using the ▲  
/▼/◄/► buttons. Although not all  
resolutions are guaranteed.  
(3)-2 To save the setting place the  
cursor on the right-most digit and  
press the ► button.  
CUSTOM  
RESOLUTION  
The horizontal and vertical positions,  
clock phase and horizontal size will  
be automatically adjusted and an  
aspect ratio will be automatically  
selected.  
(3)-3 To revert back to the previous  
resolution without saving changes  
place the cursor on the left-most  
digit and press the ◄ button.  
The screen will then return to the  
RESOLUTION menu displaying the  
previous resolution.  
For some pictures, this function may not work well.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP menu  
SETUP menu  
From the SETUP menu, items shown in the table below  
can be performed.  
Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons, and press  
the ► cursor button or the ENTER button to execute the  
item. Then perform it according to the following table.  
Item  
Description  
Selecting this item performs the automatic keystone distortion  
correction. Projector automatically corrects vertical keystone  
distortion due to the (forward/backward) setup angle by itself.  
This function will be executed only once when selected in the menu.  
When the slant of the projector is changed, execute this function  
again.  
The adjustable range for correction will vary among inputs. For  
some input, this function may not work well.  
When V:INVERT or H&V:INVERT is selected to the MIRROR item  
in the SETUP menu, if the projector screen is inclined or angled  
downward, this function may not work correctly.  
When the zoom adjustment is set to the TELE (telephoto focus),  
this function may be excessive. This function should be used when  
the zoom adjustment is set to the full WIDE (wide-angle focus)  
whenever possible.  
AUTO  
KEYSTONE  
EXECUTE  
When the projector is placed on the level (about ±0°), this function  
may not work.  
When the projector is inclined to near ±30 degree or over, this  
function may not work well.  
This function will be unavailable when the Transition Detector is  
on ( 49).  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons corrects the vertical keystone distortion.  
Shrink the top of the image  
Shrink the bottom of the image  
ó
The adjustable range of this function will vary with the type of input  
signal. For some input, this function may not work well.  
KEYSTONE  
This function will be unavailable when the Transition Detector is  
on ( 49).  
(continued on next page)  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP menu  
SETUP menu (continued)  
Item  
Description  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns off/on the whisper mode.  
NORMAL WHISPER  
ó
WHISPER  
MIRROR  
When WHISPER is selected, acoustic noise and screen brightness  
are reduced.  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the mode for mirror status.  
NORMAL  
H:INVERT  
V:INVERT  
H&V:INVERT  
ó
ó
ó
If the Transition Detector is TURN ON and MIRROR status is  
changed, Transition Detector Alarm ( 49) will be displayed when  
projector is restarted after the power switch is turned off.  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons adjusts the volume.  
VOLUME  
High  
Low  
ó
Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the built-in speaker.  
TURN ON TURN OFF  
ó
SPEAKER  
When TURN OFF is selected, the built-in speaker does not work.  
Allocates the audio ports.  
(1) Choose a picture input port using the  
▲/▼ buttons.  
COMPUTER (IN)1  
COMPUTER (IN)2  
ó
VIDEO S-VIDEO COMPONENT  
ó
ó
(2) Select the audio port to be interlocked  
with the input port using the ◄/►  
buttons.  
AUDIO  
3
ó
ó
ó
When is selected to an input port, any audio ports do not work  
interlocking with the input port.  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SCREEN menu  
SCREEN menu  
From the SCREEN menu, items shown in the table below  
can be performed.  
Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons, and press  
the ► cursor button or ENTER button to execute the item.  
Then perform it according to the following table.  
Item  
Description  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the OSD (On Screen Display) language.  
ENGLISH FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ESPAÑOL ITALIANO  
TÜRKÇE  
NORSK  
LANGUAGE  
POLSKI  
NEDERLANDS  
PORTUGUÊS  
SUOMI  
РУССКИЙ SVENSKA
뼑鞵
㐕储Ё᭛ ㅔԧЁ᭛ ᣣᧄ⺆  
Using the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons adjusts the menu position.  
MENU POSITION To quit the operation, press MENU button on the remote control or  
keep no operation for about 10 seconds.  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the mode for the BLANK screen.  
The BLANK screen is a screen for the temporarily blanking feature  
(
21). It is displayed by pressing BLANK button.  
MyScreen  
ORIGINAL  
BLUE  
WHITE  
BLACK  
ó
ó
ó
ó
Feature  
Screen can be registered by the MyScreen item  
BLANK  
MyScreen  
ORIGINAL  
.
38)  
(
Screen preset as the standard screen.  
BLUE, WHITE,  
BLACK  
Plain screens in each color.  
To avoid remaining as an afterimage, the MyScreen or ORIGINAL  
screen will change to the plain black screen after several minutes.  
(continued on next page)  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SCREEN menu  
SCREEN menu (continued)  
Item  
Description  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the mode for the start-up screen.  
The start-up screen is a screen displayed when no signal or an  
unsuitable signal is detected.  
MyScreen  
ORIGINAL  
TURN OFF  
ó
ó
Feature  
Screen can be registered by the MyScreen item  
MyScreen  
.
38)  
(
START UP  
ORIGINAL  
TURN OFF  
Screen preset as the standard screen.  
Plain black screen.  
To avoid remaining as an afterimage, the MyScreen or ORIGINAL  
screen will change to the BLANK screen ( 36) after several  
minutes. If also the BLANK screen is the MyScreen or ORIGINAL,  
the plain black screen is instead used.  
• When the TURN ON is selected to the MyScreen PASSWORD of  
SECURITY item in OPTION menu ( 46), the START UP is fixed to  
MyScreen.  
(continued on next page)  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SCREEN menu  
SCREEN menu (continued)  
Item  
Description  
This item allows you to capture an image for use as a MyScreen  
image which can be used as the BLANK screen and START UP  
screen. Display the image you want to capture before executing the  
following procedure.  
1. Selecting this item displays a dialog  
titled “MyScreen”. It will ask you if  
you start capturing an image from  
the current screen.  
Please wait for the target image to be displayed, and press the  
ENTER button when the image is displayed. The image will  
freeze and the frame for capturing will appear.  
To stop performing, press the RESET or ESC button.  
2. Using the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons adjusts  
the frame position.  
Please move the frame to the position  
of the image which you want to use.  
The frame may not be able to be  
moved for some input signals.  
To start registration, press the ENTER  
button.  
MyScreen  
To restore the screen and return to  
the previous dialog, press the RESET  
or ESC button.  
Registration takes several minutes.  
When the registration is completed, the registered screen and  
the following message are displayed for several seconds:  
“MyScreen registration is finished.”  
If the registration failed, the following message is displayed:  
“A capturing error has occurred. Please try again.”  
• This function cannot be selected when the TURN ON is selected  
to the MyScreen Lock item ( below).  
• This function cannot be selected when TURN ON is selected to  
the MyScreen PASSWORD of SECURITY item in OPTION menu  
(
46).  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the MyScreen lock function.  
TURN ON TURN OFF  
ó
When the TURN ON is selected, the MyScreen item is locked. Use  
MyScreen Lock this function for protecting the current MyScreen.  
This function cannot be selected when TURN ON is selected to  
the MyScreen PASSWORD of SECURITY item in OPTION menu  
(
46).  
(continued on next page)  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SCREEN menu  
SCREEN menu (continued)  
Item  
Description  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the message function.  
TURN ON TURN OFF  
ó
When the TURN ON is selected, the following message function works.  
“AUTO IN PROGRESS” while automatically adjusting  
“NO INPUT IS DETECTED”  
“SYNC IS OUT OF RANGE”  
“Searching…” while searching for the input  
“Detecting…” while an input signal is detected  
MESSAGE  
The indication of the input signal displayed by changing  
The indication of the aspect ratio displayed by changing  
The indication of the PICTURE MODE displayed by changing  
The indication of the MY MEMORY displayed by changing  
The indication of “FREEZE” and “II” while the projector is in the  
FREEZE mode.  
If the projector goes into the FREEZE mode while the TURN OFF  
is selected, the picture on screen is frozen without any messages,  
which is not a malfunction. ( 21)  
Each input port for this projector can have a name applied to it.  
(1) Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SCREEN menu to  
select SOURCE NAME and press the  
button.  
The SOURCE NAME menu will be displayed.  
(2) Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SOURCE  
NAME menu to select the port to be named  
and press the ► button. Right side of the  
menu is blank until a name is specified.  
The SOURCE NAME dialog will be displayed.  
(3) The current name will be displayed on the  
first line. Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons and the  
ENTER or INPUT button to select and enter  
characters. The RESET button can be used to  
erase 1 character at a time. The name can be a  
maximum of 16 characters.  
SOURCE NAME  
(4) To change an already inserted character, press  
the  
button while the cursor is on the [A-N]  
row to move the cursor to the name displayed on  
the first line and use the ◄/► buttons to select  
character to be changed. Once a character in the  
name is selected use the  
button to move the  
cursor back down to the character entry area to  
select and enter characters as described above.  
(5) Select and press ENTER or INPUT  
buttons when finished entering text.  
To revert to the previous name without saving changes press the  
ESC or ◄ button and the INPUT button simultaneously.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPTION menu  
OPTION menu  
From the OPTION menu, items shown in the table below can be  
performed.  
Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons, and press the ►  
cursor button or ENTER button to execute the item, except for the  
items LAMP TIME and FILTER TIME. Then perform it according  
to the following table.  
Item  
Description  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the automatic signal search function.  
TURN ON  
TURN OFF  
ó
When the TURN ON is selected, detecting no signal automatically  
cycles through input ports in the following order. The search is  
started from the current port. Then when an input is found, the  
projector will stop searching and display the image.  
AUTO SEARCH  
COMPUTER IN1  
COMPUTER IN2  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
COMPONENT  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the automatic keystone function.  
TURN ON TURN OFF  
ó
TURN ON : Automatic keystone distortion correction will be  
executed whenever changing the slant of the projector.  
TURN OFF : This function is disabled. Please execute the AUTO  
AUTO  
KEYSTONE  
KEYSTONE  
EXECUTE in the SETUP Menu for automatic  
keystone distortion correction.  
• When the projector is suspended from the ceiling this feature will  
not function properly so select the TURN OFF.  
• This function will be unavailable when the Transition Detector is  
on ( 49).  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the AUTO ON function.  
TURN ON  
TURN OFF  
ó
When set to the TURN ON, the lamp in projector will be  
automatically turned on without the usual procedure ( 15), only  
when the projector is supplied with the power after the power was  
cut while the lamp was on.  
AUTO ON  
• This function does not work as long as the power has been  
supplied to the projector while the lamp is off.  
• After turning the lamp on by the AUTO ON function, if neither input  
nor operation is detected for about 30 minutes, the projector is  
turned off, even though the AUTO OFF function ( 41) is disabled.  
(continued on next page)  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPTION menu  
OPTION menu (continued)  
Item  
Description  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons adjusts the time to count down to  
automatically turn the projector off.  
Long (max. 99 minutes)  
Short (min. 0 minute = DISABLE)  
ó
When the time is set to 0, the projector is not turned off automatically.  
When the time is set to 1 to 99, and when the passed time with no-  
signal or an unsuitable signal reaches at the set time, the projector  
lamp will be turned off.  
AUTO OFF  
If one of the projector's buttons or the remote control buttons  
is pressed or one of the commands (except get commands) is  
transmitted to the CONTROL port during the corresponding time,  
projector will not be turned off.  
Please refer to the section “Turning off the power” ( 15).  
The lamp time is the time counted after the last resetting. It is  
shown in OPTION menu as the usage time of the lamp.  
Pressing RESET button or the ► button displays a dialog.  
To reset the lamp time, select RESET using the ▲ button.  
LAMP TIME  
RESET CANCEL  
Please reset the lamp time only when you have replaced the lamp,  
for a suitable indication about the lamp.  
For the lamp replacement, see the section "Lamp" ( 54).  
The filter time is the time counted after the last resetting. It is shown  
in the OPTION menu as the usage time of the air filter.  
Pressing the RESET button or the ► button displays a dialog.  
To reset the filter time, select the RESET using the ▲ button.  
FILTER TIME  
RESET CANCEL  
Please reset the filter time only when you have cleaned or replaced  
the air filter, for a suitable indication about the air filter.  
For the air filter cleaning, see the section "Air filter" ( 56).  
(continued on next page)  
4ꢀ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPTION menu  
OPTION menu (continued)  
Item  
Description  
This item is to assign one of the following functions to MY BUTTON 1 and 2  
on the remote control ( 6).  
Choose 1 or 2 on the MY BUTTON menu using the ◄/► button first. Then  
using the ▲/▼ buttons sets one of the following functions to the chosen  
button.  
• COMPUTER1: Sets port to COMPUTER IN1.  
• COMPUTER2: Sets port to COMPUTER IN2.  
• COMPONENT: Sets port to COMPONENT(Y, Cb/Pb, Cr/Pr)  
• S-VIDEO: Sets port to S-VIDEO.  
• VIDEO: Sets port to VIDEO.  
e-SHOT: Displays the e-SHOT menu  
(
52).  
INFORMATION: Displays a dialog of INPUT -INFORMATION- or NETWORK  
-INFORMATION- 44, 53).  
(
The displayed dialog is switched as below every time the MY BUTTON is  
pushed.  
When an input signal is found:  
INPUT -INFORMATION- NETWORK -INFORMATION- OFF  
MY BUTTON  
When an input signal is not found:  
NETWORK -INFORMATION- OFF  
ó
• AUTO KEYSTONE  
Performs automatic keystone distortion correction ( 34).  
EXECUTE:  
• MY MEMORY: Loads one of adjustment data stored ( 27).  
When more than one data are saved, the adjustment changes every time  
the MY BUTTON is pushed.  
When no data is saved in memory, the dialog  
"No saved data" appears.  
When the current adjustment is not saved  
to memory, the dialog as shown in the right  
appears.  
If you want to keep the current adjustment, please press the ◄ button to  
quit. Otherwise loading a data will lose the current adjusted condition.  
• PICTURE MODE: Changes the PICTURE MODE ( 24).  
• FILTER RESET: Displays the filter time reset confirmation dialogue ( 41).  
• VOLUME+: Set the volume up.  
• VOLUME-: Set the volume down.  
Selecting this item displays the SERVICE menu.  
Select an item using the ▲/▼ buttons, and press the ► button or the  
ENTER button to execute the item.  
FAN SPEED  
AUTO ADJUST  
GHOST  
FILTER MESSAGE  
KEY LOCK  
ó
ó
ó
ó
FACTORY RESET  
I NFORMATION  
REMOTE FREQ.  
ó
ó
SERVICE  
FAN SPEED  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the rotation speed  
of the cooling fans. The HIGH is the mode for use at  
highlands etc. Note that the projector is noisier when the  
HIGH is selected.  
HIGH  
NORMAL  
ó
(continued on next page)  
4ꢁ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPTION menu  
OPTION menu (continued)  
Item  
Description  
AUTO ADJUST  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons enables/disables the  
automatic adjustment. When DISABLE is selected,  
the automatic adjustment feature is disabled,  
although rough adjustment is automatically performed  
depending on the basic setting.  
FINE  
FAST  
DISABLE  
ó
ó
FINE: Finer tuning including H.SIZE adjustment.  
FAST: Faster tuning, setting H.SIZE to prearranged data for the  
input signal.  
Depending on conditions, such as input image, signal cable to  
the projector, environment around the projector, etc., the automatic  
adjustment may not work correctly. In such a case, please  
choose DISABLE to disable the automatic adjustment, and make  
adjustment manually.  
GHOST  
1. Select a color element of ghost using the ◄/►  
buttons.  
2. Adjust the selected element using the ▲/▼ buttons to  
disappear ghost.  
SERVICE  
(continued)  
FILTER MESSAGE  
Use the ▲/▼ button to set the timer for the interval to  
show the message for cleaning up the air filter.  
50h  
100h  
200h  
300h  
400h  
500h  
ó
ó
ó
ó
ó
TURN OFF  
800h  
700h  
600h  
ó
ó
ó
After choosing a choice except TURN OFF, the  
message “REMINDER *** HRS PASSED AFTER THE  
LAST FILTER CHECK” will appear after the timer  
reaches the interval time set by this feature ( 59).  
When the TURN OFF is chosen, the message will not appear.  
Utilize this feature to keep the air filter clean, setting the suitable  
time according to your environment of this projector.  
Please check and clean the air filter periodically, even if there is no  
message. If the air filter becomes to be blocked by dust or others,  
the internal temperature will rise, which could cause malfunction, or  
reduce the lifetime of the projector.  
Please be careful with the operating environment of the projector  
and the condition of the air filter.  
(continued on next page)  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPTION menu  
OPTION menu (continued)  
Item  
Description  
KEY LOCK  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the key lock feature. When  
TURN ON is selected, the buttons on the projector except the  
STANDBY/ON button are locked.  
TURN ON  
TURN OFF  
ó
Please use to avoid a mischief and touching accidentally. This  
function does not have any effect on the remote control.  
REMOTE FREQ.  
Use the ▲/▼ button to change the projector's remote sensor  
setting.  
1:NORMAL  
2:HIGH  
ó
Items with a checkmark are on. The factory  
default setting is for both 1:NORMAL and 2:  
HIGH to be on. If the remote control does not  
function correctly set this to either only 1 or  
only 2 ( 14).  
SERVICE  
(continued)  
Neither can be turned off at the same time.  
INFORMATION  
Selecting this item displays a dialog titled “INPUT -INFORMATION-”.  
It shows the information about the current input.  
The “FRAME LOCK” message on the dialog means the frame lock  
function is working ( 32).  
This item can't be selected for no signal and sync out.  
FACTORY RESET  
Selecting RESET using the button ▲ performs this function. By  
this function, all the items in all of menus will collectively return to  
the initial setting. Note that the items LAMP TIME, FILTER TIME,  
LANGUAGE, SECURITY and NETWORK settings are not reset.  
RESET CANCEL  
(continued on next page)  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPTION menu  
OPTION menu (continued)  
Item  
Description  
This projector is equipped with security functions.  
User registration is required before using the security functions.  
Please contact your local dealer.  
1. Using Security Features  
1.1 Inputting the PASSWORD  
1.1-1 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the OPTION  
menu to select SECURITY and press the  
► button. The ENTER PASSWORD box  
will be displayed.  
The factory default PASSWORD is 8471.  
This PASSWORD can be changed (1.2 Changing the PASSWORD (  
below)).  
• It is strongly recommended the factory default PASSWORD to be  
changed as soon as possible.  
1.1-2 Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter  
the registered PASSWORD. Move the  
cursor to the right side of the ENTER  
PASSWORD box and press the ► button  
to display the SECURITY menu.  
If an incorrect PASSWORD is input the  
ENTER PASSWORD box will be displayed again. If incorrect  
PASSWORD is input 3 times the projector will turn off. Afterwards the  
projector will turn off every time an incorrect PASSWORD is input.  
SECURITY  
1.2 Changing the PASSWORD  
1.2-1 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SECURITY  
menu to select SECURITY PASSWORD  
CHANGE and press the ► button to display  
the ENTER NEW PASSWORD box.  
1.2-2 Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the new PASSWORD.  
1.2-3 Move the cursor to the right side of the  
ENTER NEW PASSWORD box and  
press the ► button to display the NEW  
PASSWORD AGAIN box, enter the same  
PASSWORD again.  
1.2-4 Move the cursor to the right side of the NEW  
PASSWORD AGAIN box and press the ►  
button and the NOTE NEW PASSWORD  
box will be displayed for about 20 seconds,  
please make note of the PASSWORD  
during this time.  
Pressing the ENTER button will close the NOTE NEW PASSWORD  
box.  
• Please do not forget your PASSWORD.  
(continued on next page)  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPTION menu  
OPTION menu (continued)  
Item  
Description  
1.3 If you have forgotten your PASSWORD  
1.3-1 Follow the procedure in 1.1-1 to display the  
ENTER PASSWORD box.  
1.3-2 While the ENTER PASSWORD box is  
displayed, press and hold the RESET  
button for about 3 seconds or press and  
hold the INPUT and ► buttons on the  
projector for about 3 seconds.  
The 10-digit Inquiring Code will be displayed.  
• If there is no key input for about 55 seconds while the Inquiring Code is  
displayed the menu will close. If necessary repeat the process from 1.3-1.  
1.3-3 Contact your dealer with the 10-digit Inquiring Code. Your PASSWORD  
will be sent after your user registration information is confirmed.  
2. Using the MyScreen PASSWORD Function  
The MyScreen PASSWORD function can be used to prohibit access to the  
MyScreen function and prevent the currently registered MyScreen image  
from being overwritten.  
SECURITY  
(continued)  
2.1 Turning on the MyScreen  
Function  
PASSWORD  
2.1-1 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SECURITY  
menu to select MyScreen PASSWORD  
and press the ► button to display the  
MyScreen PASSWORD on/off menu.  
2.2 Setting the PASSWORD  
2.2-1 Display the MyScreen PASSWORD on/off menu using the procedure  
in 2.1-1.  
2.2-2 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the MyScreen  
PASSWORD on/off menu to select TURN ON.  
The ENTER PASSWORD box (small) will be  
displayed.  
2.2-3 Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the  
PASSWORD.  
Move the cursor to the right side of the ENTER  
PASSWORD box (small) and press the ►  
button to display the PASSWORD AGAIN box,  
enter the same PASSWORD again.  
(continued on next page)  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPTION menu  
OPTION menu (continued)  
Item  
Description  
2.2-4 Move the cursor to the right side of the  
PASSWORD AGAIN box and press the  
► button to display the PASSWORD for  
about 20 seconds, please make note of the  
PASSWORD during this time.  
Pressing the ENTER button will return to  
MyScreen PASSWORD on/off menu.  
When a PASSWORD is set for MyScreen:  
The MyScreen registration function (and menu) will be unavailable.  
The MyScreen Lock function (and menu) will be unavailable.  
The START UP setting will be locked on MyScreen (and the menu will  
be unavailable).  
Turning the MyScreen PASSWORD off will allow normal operation of both  
functions.  
Please do not forget your MyScreen PASSWORD.  
2.3 Turning the PASSWORD off  
2.3-1 Follow the procedure in 2.1-1 to display the MyScreen PASSWORD  
on/off menu.  
2.3-2 Select TURN OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD box (large).  
Enter the registered PASSWORD and the screen will return to the  
MyScreen on/off menu.  
If an incorrect PASSWORD is input the menu will close. If necessary  
repeat the process from 2.3-1.  
SECURITY  
(continued)  
2.4 If you have forgotten your PASSWORD  
2.4-1 Follow the procedure in 2.1-1 to display the MyScreen PASSWORD  
on/off menu.  
2.4-2 Select TURN OFF to display the ENTER  
PASSWORD box (large). The 10-digit  
Inquiring Code will be displayed inside the  
box.  
2.4-3 Contact your dealer with the 10-digit Inquiring Code. Your PASSWORD  
will be sent after your user registration information is confirmed.  
3. Using the PIN LOCK Function  
PIN LOCK is a function which prevents the projector from being used unless  
a registered Code is input.  
3.1 Registering the PIN Code  
3.1-1 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SECURITY menu  
to select PIN LOCK and press the ► button  
or the ENTER button to display the PIN LOCK  
on/off menu.  
(continued on next page)  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPTION menu  
OPTION menu (continued)  
Item  
Description  
3.1-2 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the PIN LOCK  
on/off menu to select TURN ON and the  
PIN BOX will be displayed.  
3.1-3 Input a 4 part PIN Code using the ▲, ▼,  
◄, ►, COMPUTER and INPUT buttons.  
A PIN Code again box will appear. Reenter  
the same PIN Code. This will complete the  
PIN Code registration.  
If there is no key input for about 55 seconds while the PIN BOX or the  
PIN Code again box are displayed the menu will close. If necessary  
repeat the process from 3.1-1.  
Afterwards, anytime the projector is restarted after AC power is turned off  
the PIN BOX will be displayed. Enter the registered PIN Code.  
The projector can be used after entering the registered PIN Code. If an  
incorrect PIN Code is input the PIN BOX will be displayed again.  
If an incorrect PIN Code is input 3 times the projector will turn off.  
Afterwards the projector will turn off every time an incorrect PIN Code is  
input. The projector will also turn off if there is no key input for about 5  
minutes while the PIN BOX is displayed.  
This function will activate only when the projector is started after AC  
power is turned off.  
SECURITY  
(continued)  
Please do not forget your PIN Code.  
3.2 Turning Off the PIN LOCK Function  
3.2-1 Follow the procedure in 3.1-1 to display the PIN LOCK on/off menu.  
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select TURN OFF and the PIN BOX will be  
displayed.  
Enter the registered PIN Code to turn the PIN LOCK function off.  
If an incorrect PASSWORD is entered the menu will close.  
3.3 If you have forgotten your PIN Code  
3.3-1 While the PIN BOX is displayed, press and  
hold the RESET button for 3 seconds or  
press and hold the INPUT and ► buttons  
for 3 seconds. The 10-digit Inquiring Code  
will be displayed.  
If it passes for about 5 minutes after the PIN BOX is displayed the  
projector will turn off.  
3.3-2 Contact your dealer with the 10-digit Inquiring Code. Your PASSWORD  
will be sent after your user registration information is confirmed.  
(continued on next page)  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPTION menu  
OPTION menu (continued)  
Item  
Description  
4. Using the Transition Detector Function  
While the Transition Detector function is ON, when power switch is started  
to supply to the projector, it might react as below.  
• Transition Detector alarm shown below might appear on screen, if the  
projector has been moved or re-installed.  
• Transition Detector alarm might appear on screen, if the MIRROR setting  
has been changed.  
• Keystone adjustment feature has been prohibited as long as the Transition  
Detector function is ON.  
4.1 Turning On the  
Function  
Transition Detector  
4.1-1 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SECURITY  
menu to select TRANSITION DETECTOR and  
press the ► or the ENTER button to display  
the TRANSITION DETECTOR on/off menu.  
Select TURN ON and the current angle and  
mirror setting will be recorded.  
• This feature may not function properly if the projector is not in a stable  
position when TURN ON is selected.  
4.1-2 If this function is set to TURN ON when  
the vertical angle of the projector or mirror  
setting at which the projector is turned on  
is different than the previously recorded the  
Transition Detector alarm will be displayed  
and the projector will not display the input  
signal.  
SECURITY  
(continued)  
Set the Transition Detector off in the SECURITY menu to display the input  
signal.  
If the Transition Detector alarm is displayed for about 5 minutes the lamp  
will turn off. This function will activate only when the projector is started  
after turning off the AC power.  
4.2 Setting the  
PASSWORD  
Transition Detector  
4.2-1 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SECURITY menu to select TRANSITION  
DETECTOR and press the ► or the ENTER button to display the  
TRANSITION DETECTOR on/off menu.  
4.2-2 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the TRANSITION  
DETECTOR on/off menu to select TURN  
ON. The ENTER PASSWORD box (small)  
will be displayed.  
4.2-3 Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter a  
PASSWORD. Move the cursor to the right  
side of the ENTER PASSWORD box (small)  
and press the ► button to display the  
PASSWORD AGAIN box, enter the same  
PASSWORD again.  
(continued on next page)  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPTION menu  
OPTION menu (continued)  
Item  
Description  
4.2-4 Move the cursor to the right side of the  
PASSWORD AGAIN box and press the  
► button to display the PASSWORD for  
about 20 seconds, please make note of the  
PASSWORD during this time.  
Pressing the ENTER button will return to the TRANSITION DETECTOR  
on/off menu.  
• Please do not forget your Transition Detector PASSWORD.  
4.3 Setting the Transition Detector off  
4.3-1 Follow the procedure in 4.1-1 to display the TRANSITION DETECTOR  
on/off menu.  
4.3-2 Select TURN OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD box (large).  
Enter the registered PASSWORD and the screen will return to the  
TRANSITION DETECTOR on/off menu. If an incorrect PASSWORD is  
input the menu will close. If necessary repeat the process from 4.3-1.  
SECURITY  
(continued)  
4.4 If you have forgotten your PASSWORD  
4.4-1 Follow the procedure in 4.1-1 to display the TRANSITION DETECTOR  
on/off menu.  
4.4-2 Select TURN OFF to display the ENTER  
PASSWORD box (large). The 10-digit  
Inquiring Code will be displayed inside the  
box.  
4.4-3 Contact your dealer with the 10-digit Inquiring Code. Your PASSWORD  
will be sent after your user registration information is confirmed.  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NETWORK menu  
NETWORK menu  
Remember that incorrect network settings on this projector  
may cause trouble on the network. Be sure to consult with  
your network administrator before connecting to an existing  
access point on your network.  
From the NETWORK menu, items shown in the table  
below can be performed.  
Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons, and press the ► cursor button or  
ENTER button to execute the item. Then perform it according to the following  
table.  
See the User’s Manual - Network Guide for details of network operation.  
NOTE • The factory default setting for DHCP is ON. You do not have to set up DHCP,  
IP ADDRESS, SUBNET MASK or DEFAULT GATEWAY if your network has DHCP  
enabled. ( User’s Manual - Network Guide)  
• If you are not utilizing SNTP ( User’s Manual - Network Guide), then you must set  
the date and time during the initial installation. Please refer to the item DATE AND TIME  
in the following table ( 52).  
Item  
Operation  
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to turn DHCP on/off  
ON OFF  
ó
DHCP  
Select OFF when the network does not  
have DHCP enabled.  
• When the DHCP setting changes to ON, it takes a little time to  
obtain IP address from DHCP server.  
(Dynamic Host  
Configuration  
Protocol)  
• Auto IP function will be assigned an IP address if the projector  
could not obtain an IP address from server even if DHCP is ON.  
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the IP  
address. This function can only be used when  
DHCP is set to OFF.  
• The IP address is the number that identifies  
this projector on the network. You cannot  
have two devices with the same IP address  
on the same network.  
IP ADDRESS  
• The IP ADDRESS “0.0.0.0” is prohibited.  
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the same  
subnet mask used by your PC. This function  
can only be used when DHCP is set to OFF.  
SUBNET MASK  
The SUBNET MASK ”0.0.0.0” is prohibited.  
5ꢀ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NETWORK menu  
NETWORK menu (continued)  
Item  
Operation  
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the  
default gateway (a node on a computer  
network that serves as an access point to  
another network) address.  
DEFAULT  
GATEWAY  
This function can only be used when DHCP is set to OFF.  
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to enter the time  
difference.  
Set the same time difference as the  
one set on your PC. If unsure, consult  
your IT manager. Use the ◄ button to  
return to the menu after setting the TIME  
DIFFERENCE.  
TIME  
DIFFERENCE  
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the Year (last two digits),  
Month, Date, Hour and Minute.  
• The projector will override this setting and retrieve the date and  
DATE AND TIME  
time information from the Time server when SNTP is enabled. (  
“Date/Time Settingssection of the User’s Manual - Network  
Guide)  
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select an item and the ► or ENTER button  
to display the image.  
Image1  
Image2  
Image3  
Image4  
File names of registered images are  
displayed by 16 characters or less.  
Example: DEMONSTRATION-01  
"NEW" stamp is added to the head of line  
when the image is registered newly. After  
the image is displayed, "NEW" stamp will  
be erased. Once an image is displayed,  
you can use the ▲/▼ buttons to page  
e-SHOT  
through the images. Use the ◄ or ESC  
button to return to the menu.  
Pressing the RESET button on the remote control while an image is  
being displayed will display the RESET menu. The displayed image  
can be deleted from the RESET menu using the ENTER button on  
the remote control or the INPUT button on the projector.  
If you do not wish to delete the image use the ESC button on the  
remote control or push the ◄ and INPUT buttons on the projector at  
the same time.  
Items with no image stored cannot be selected.  
Images can be changed using the ▲/▼ buttons while the image  
data downloads.  
5ꢁ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NETWORK menu  
NETWORK menu (continued)  
Item  
Operation  
Selecting this item displays the  
NETWORK -INFORMATION- dialog  
for confirming the network settings.  
Only the first 16 characters of the projector name are displayed.  
• Nothing (blank) is shown in the NAME field until you setup the  
item. For setup, please refer to “Network Settings” section of  
User’s Manual - Network Guide.  
INFORMATION  
When the voltage level of the battery for the internal clock  
decreases, set time may become incorrect even though accurate  
date and time are input. Replace a battery through the following the  
instructions. ( 57)  
• IP ADDRESS, SUBNET MASK and DEFAULT GATEWAY indicate  
“0.0.0.0” when DHCP is ON and the projector has not gotten  
address from DHCP server.  
Executing this item restarts and initializes the network functions.  
Choose the RESTART using the button ►.  
Then use the button ▲ to execute.  
SERVICE  
Network will be once cut off when choose restart.  
If DHCP is selected on, IP address may be changed.  
After selecting RESTART, NETWORK menu may not be controlled  
approx. 30 seconds.  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance  
Maintenance  
Lamp  
A lamp has finite product life. Using the lamp for long periods of time could cause  
the pictures darker or the color tone poor. Note that each lamp has a different  
lifetime, and some may burst or burn out soon after you start using them.  
Preparation of a new lamp and early replacement are recommended. To prepare  
a new lamp, contact your dealer and tell the lamp type number.  
Type number : 456-8755G  
Replacing the lamp  
Turn the projector off, and unplug the power cord.  
Allow the projector to cool for at least 45 minutes.  
Lamp cover  
1.  
2.  
Prepare a new lamp.  
If the projector is mounted on a ceiling, or if the lamp  
has broken, also ask the dealer to replace the lamp.  
In case of replacement by yourself, follow the following procedure.  
Loosen the screw (marked by arrow) of the lamp cover  
3.  
and then slide the lamp cover to the side to remove it.  
Loosen the 2 screws (marked by arrow) of the  
lamp, and slowly pick up the lamp by the handles.  
4.  
Insert the new lamp, and retighten firmly the  
5.  
2 screws of the lamp that are loosened in the  
previous process to lock it in place.  
Handles  
Slide the lamp cover back in place and firmly  
fasten the screw of the lamp cover.  
6.  
Turn the projector on and reset the lamp time  
using the LAMP TIME item in the OPTION menu.  
7.  
(1) Press the MENU button to display a menu.  
(2) Point at the Go to Advanced Menu … in the menu  
using the ▼/▲ button, then press the ► button.  
(3) Point at the OPTION in the left column of the menu  
using the ▼/▲button, then press the ► button.  
(4) Point at the LAMP TIME using the ▼/▲ button, then press the ► button. A  
dialog will appear.  
(5) Press the ▲ button to select RESET on the dialog. It performs resetting the  
lamp time.  
CAUTION ►Do not touch any inner space of the projector, while the lamp  
is taken out.  
NOTE Please reset the lamp time only when you have replaced the lamp,  
for a suitable indication about the lamp.  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance  
Lamp (continued)  
Lamp warning  
HIGH VOLTAGE  
HIGH TEMPERATURE  
HIGH PRESSURE  
WARNING ►The projector uses a high-pressure mercury glass lamp. The  
lamp can break with a loud bang, or burn out, if jolted or scratched, handled  
while hot, or worn over time. Note that each lamp has a different lifetime, and  
some may burst or burn out soon after you start using them. In addition, when  
the bulb bursts, it is possible for shards of glass to fly into the lamp housing, and  
for gas containing mercury to escape from the projector’s vent holes.  
About disposal of a lamp: This product contains a mercury lamp; do not put  
it in a trash. Dispose of it in accordance with environmental laws.  
• For lamp recycling, go to www.lamprecycle.org. (in the US)  
• For product disposal, contact your local government agency  
or www.eiae.org (in the US) or www.epsc.ca (in Canada).  
For more information, call your dealer.  
If the lamp should break (it will make a loud bang when it does),  
unplug the power cord from the outlet, and make sure to request a  
replacement lamp from your local dealer. Note that shards of glass  
could damage the projector’s internals, or cause injury during handling,  
so please do not try to clean the projector or replace the lamp yourself.  
• If the lamp should break (it will make a loud bang when it does),  
Disconnect  
the plug  
from the  
power  
ventilate the room well, and make sure not to breathe the gas that  
comes out of the projector vents, or get it in your eyes or mouth.  
• Before replacing the lamp, turn the projector off and unplug the power  
outlet  
cord, then wait at least 45 minutes for the lamp to cool sufficiently.  
Handling the lamp while hot can cause burns, as well as damaging the  
lamp.  
Never unscrew except the appointed (marked by an arrow) screws.  
• Do not open the lamp cover while the projector is suspended from  
above. This is dangerous, since if the lamp’s bulb has broken, the  
shards will fall out when the cover is opened. In addition, working in  
high places is dangerous, so ask your local dealer to have the lamp  
replaced even if the bulb is not broken.  
• Do not use the projector with the lamp cover removed. At the lamp  
replacing, make sure that the screws are screwed in firmly. Loose  
screws could result in damage or injury.  
Use only the lamp of the specified type.  
• If the lamp breaks soon after the first time it is used, it is possible  
that there are electrical problems elsewhere besides the lamp. If this  
happens, contact your local dealer or a service representative.  
Handle with care: jolting or scratching could cause the lamp bulb to burst during use.  
• Using the lamp for long periods of time could cause it dark, not to light  
up or to burst. When the pictures appear dark, or when the color tone  
is poor, please replace the lamp as soon as possible. Do not use old  
(used) lamps; this is a cause of breakage.  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance  
Air filter  
Please check and clean the air filter periodically. When the indicators or a  
message prompts you to clean the air filter, comply with it as soon as possible.  
Replace the air filter when it is damaged or too soiled. To prepare a new air filter,  
contact your dealer and tell the air filter type number.  
Type number : MU04951  
When you replace the lamp, please replace the air filter. An air filter of specified  
type will come together with a replacement lamp for this projector.  
Cleaning the air filter  
Filter cover  
Turn the projector off, and unplug the power cord.  
Allow the projector to sufficiently cool down.  
Use a vacuum cleaner on and around the filter  
cover.  
Pull the filter cover knobs while lifting it. The filter  
unit which consists of the filter’ cover, air filter and  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Filter cover knobs  
filter frame will come off.  
Use a vacuum cleaner for the filter vent of the  
projector and the filter frame side of the filter unit.  
If the air filter is damaged or too soiled, replace it  
according to the following procedure number 5 to 7.  
Otherwise, please jump to the procedure number 8.  
Pull the filter frame’ knob up while holding the filter  
Filter unit  
4.  
5.  
cover. The filter frame will come off and the air  
filter will appear.  
Filter frame  
Replace the air filter with new one.  
6.  
Air filter  
Put the filter frame back.  
7.  
8.  
9.  
Put the filter unit back into the projector.  
Turn the projector on and reset the filter time using  
the FILTER TIME item in the EASY MENU.  
(1) Press the MENU button to display a menu.  
Filter cover  
(2) Point at the FILTER TIME using the ▼/▲ button, then press the ► button. A dialog will appear.  
(3) Press the ▲ button to select RESET on the dialog. It performs resetting the filter time.  
WARNING ►Before taking care of the air filter, make sure the power cord  
is not plugged in, then allow the projector to cool sufficiently.  
Use only the air filter of the specified type. Do not use the projector without the  
air filter or the filter cover. It could result in a fire or malfunction to the projector  
Clean the air filter periodically. If the air filter becomes clogged by dust or the like,  
.
internal temperatures rise and could cause a fire, a burn or malfunction to the projector.  
NOTE • Please reset the filter time only when you have cleaned or  
replaced the air filter, for a suitable indication about the air filter.  
• The projector may display the message such as “CHECK THE AIR FLOW”  
or turn off the projector, to prevent the internal heat level rising.  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance  
Internal clock battery  
Consumption of the battery makes the internal clock not to work correctly. When the internal clock  
is wrong or it has stopped, please replace the battery according to the following procedures.  
Slot Cover  
Turn the projector off, and unplug the power cord. Allow  
1.  
2.  
the projector to cool sufficiently.  
After making sure that the projector has cooled  
adequately, pull the slot cover forward, pushing slightly  
Battery Slot  
its edge up, and remove it from the projector.  
Remove the battery case.  
3.  
Hold the battery case gutter by finger nail or other thing  
and pull out the battery case slowly from the battery slot.  
While the projector is installed upside down, such as a  
ceiling mount, please remember the battery will drop down  
as soon as pulling the battery case out.  
Take the old battery out from the battery case.  
4.  
5.  
Replace a new battery.  
Replace battery with HITACHI MAXELL, Part  
No.CR2032 only. Use of another battery may present a risk  
of fire or explosion.  
Battery Case  
Battery  
Put a new battery into battery case. Please make sure that  
the + is facing upward. Insert the battery case slowly into  
the battery slot until you hear the snap.  
Battery  
Case  
Close the slot cover.  
Replace the slot cover by reversing the procedure used  
when removing the cover.  
6.  
Battery (+)  
Battery  
Case  
Battery (-)  
WARNING Always handle the batteries with care and use them only as directed. Battery  
may explode if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire.  
And also improper use may result in cracking or leakage, which could result in fire, injury and/or  
pollution of the surrounding environment.  
Be sure to use only the batteries specified. Do not use batteries of different types at the same  
time. Do not mix a new battery with used one.  
Make sure the plus and minus terminals are correctly aligned when loading a battery.  
Keep a battery away from children and pets. If swallowed consult a physician  
immediately for emergency treatment.  
Do not short circuit or solder a battery.  
Do not allow a battery in a fire or water. Keep batteries in a dark, cool and dry place.  
If you observe a leakage of a battery, wipe out the flower and then replace a battery. If the liquid  
adheres to your body or clothes, rinse well with water immediately.  
Obey the local laws on disposing the battery.  
NOTE The internal clock’s time will be reset when the battery is removed.  
Please reconfigure the time via the menu or a web browser after replacing the battery.  
(
"Date/Time Settings" of the User’s Manual - Network Guide)  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance  
Other care  
Inside of the projector  
In order to ensure the safe use of your projector, please have it cleaned and  
inspected by your dealer about once every year.  
Caring for the lens  
If the lens is flawed, soiled or fogged, it could cause deterioration of display  
quality. Please take care of the lens, being cautious of handling.  
Turn the projector off, and unplug the power cord. Allow the projector to cool  
sufficiently.  
1.  
After making sure that the projector is cool adequately, lightly wipe the lens  
with a commercially available lens-cleaning wipe. Do not touch the lens  
directly with your hand.  
2.  
Caring for the cabinet and remote control  
Incorrect care could have adverse influence such as discoloration, peeling paint,  
etc.  
Turn the projector off, and unplug the power cord. Allow the projector to cool  
sufficiently.  
1.  
After making sure that the projector is cool adequately, lightly wipe with gauze  
or a soft cloth.  
If the projector is extremely dirty, dip soft cloth in water or a neutral cleaner  
diluted in water, and wipe lightly after wringing well. Then, wipe lightly with a  
soft, dry cloth.  
2.  
WARNING ►Before caring, make sure the power cord is not plugged in,  
and then allow the projector to cool sufficiently. The care in a high temperature  
state of the projector could cause a burn and/or malfunction to the projector.  
►Never try to care for the inside of the projector personally. Doing is so  
dangerous.  
►Avoid wetting the projector or inserting liquids in the projector. It could result  
in a fire, an electric shock, and/or malfunction to the projector.  
• Do not put anything containing water, cleaners or chemicals near the  
projector.  
• Do not use aerosols or sprays.  
CAUTION ►Please take right care of the projector according to the  
following. Incorrect care could cause not only an injury but adverse influence  
such as discoloration, peeling paint, etc.  
►Do not use cleaners or chemicals other than those specified in this manual.  
►Do not polish or wipe with hard objects.  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
If an abnormal operation should occur, stop using the projector immediately.  
WARNING ►Never use the projector if abnormal operations such as  
smoke, strange odor, excessive sound, damaged casing or elements or cables,  
penetration of liquids or foreign matter, etc. should occur. In such cases,  
immediately disconnect the power plug from the power outlet. After making sure  
that the smoke or odor has stopped, contact your dealer or service company.  
Otherwise if a problem occurs with the projector, the following checks and  
measures are recommended before requesting repair.  
If this does not resolve the problem, please contact your dealer or service  
company. They will tell you what warranty condition is applied.  
Related messages  
When some message appears, check and cope with it according to the following  
table. Although these messages will be automatically disappeared around several  
minutes, it will be reappeared every time the power is turned on.  
Message  
Description  
There is no input signal.  
Please confirm the signal input connection, and the status  
NO INPUT IS DETECTED  
  
of the signal source.  
The horizontal or vertical frequency of the input signal  
is not within the specified range.  
SYNC IS OUT OF RANGE  
  
Please confirm the specs for your projector or the signal  
fH kHz fV Hz  
source specs.  
The internal temperature is rising.  
Please turn the power off, and allow the projector to cool  
down at least 20 minutes. After having confirmed the  
following items, please turn the power ON again.  
Is there blockage of the air passage aperture?  
Is the air filter dirty?  
CHECK THE AIR FLOW  
Does the peripheral temperature exceed 35°C?  
If the same indication is displayed after the remedy, please set  
FAN SPEED of the SERVICE item in the OPTION menu to HIGH.  
REMINDER  
*** HRS PASSED AFTER THE  
LAST FILTER CHECK.  
FILTER MAINTENANCE IS ESSENTIAL  
TO REMOVE WARNING MESSAGE,  
RESET FILTER TIMER.  
A note of precaution when cleaning the air filter.  
Please immediately turn the power off, and clean or change  
the air filter referring to the “Air Filter” section of this manual.  
After you have cleaned or changed the air filter, please be  
sure to reset the filter timer ( 56).  
SEE MANUAL FURTHER INFO.  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Regarding the indicator lamps  
When operation of the LAMP, TEMP and POWER indicators differs from usual,  
check and cope with it according to the following table.  
POWER  
indicator indicator indicator  
LAMP  
TEMP  
Description  
Lighting  
In Orange  
Turned  
off  
Turned  
off  
The projector is in a standby state.  
Please refer to the section “Power on/off”.  
Blinking  
In Green  
Turned  
off  
Turned  
off  
The projector is warming up.  
Please wait.  
Lighting  
In Green  
Turned  
off  
Turned  
off  
The projector is in an on state.  
Ordinary operations may be performed.  
Blinking  
In Orange  
Turned  
off  
Turned  
off  
The projector is cooling down.  
Please wait.  
The projector is cooling down. A certain error  
has been detected.  
Please wait until POWER indicator finishes blinking,  
and then perform the proper measure using the item  
descriptions below.  
Blinking  
In Red  
(discre- (discre-  
tionary) tionary)  
The lamp does not light, and there is a possibility  
that interior portion has become heated.  
Please turn the power off, and allow the projector to  
cool down at least 20 minutes. After the projector has  
sufficiently cooled down, please make confirmation of  
the following items, and then turn the power on again.  
• Is there blockage of the air passage aperture?  
• Is the air filter dirty?  
Blinking  
In Red  
or  
Lighting  
In Red  
Lighting Turned  
In Red  
off  
• Does the peripheral temperature exceed 35°C?  
If the same indication is displayed after the remedy,  
please change the lamp referring to the section “Lamp”.  
The lamp cover has not been properly fixed.  
Please turn the power off, and allow the projector to  
cool down at least 45 minutes. After the projector has  
Blinking  
In Red  
or  
Lighting  
In Red  
Blinking Turned sufficiently cooled down, please make confirmation of  
In Red  
off  
the attachment state of the lamp cover. After performing  
any needed maintenance, turn the power on again.  
If the same indication is displayed after the remedy,  
please contact your dealer or service company.  
The cooling fan is not operating.  
Please turn the power off, and allow the projector to  
cool down at least 20 minutes. After the projector has  
Turned Blinking sufficiently cooled down, please make confirmation  
Blinking  
In Red  
or  
Lighting  
In Red  
off  
In Red that no foreign matter has become caught in the fan,  
etc., and then turn the power on again.  
If the same indication is displayed after the remedy,  
please contact your dealer or service company.  
(continued on next page)  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Regarding the indicator lamps (continued)  
POWER  
indicator indicator indicator  
LAMP  
TEMP  
Description  
There is a possibility that the interior portion  
has become heated.  
Please turn the power off, and allow the projector to cool down at least  
20 minutes. After the projector has sufficiently cooled down, please make  
confirmation of the following items, and then turn the power on again.  
• Is there blockage of the air passage aperture?  
• Is the air filter dirty?  
Blinking  
In Red  
or  
Lighting  
Turned Lighting  
off  
In Red  
• Does the peripheral temperature exceed 35°C?  
If the same indication is displayed after the remedy, please  
set FAN SPEED of SERVICE item in OPTION menu to HIGH  
In Red  
.
42)  
(
It is time to clean the air filter.  
Please immediately turn the power off, and clean or change  
the air filter referring to the section “Air Filter”. After cleaning or  
changing the air filter, please be sure to reset the filter timer.  
After the remedy, reset the power to ON.  
Lighting  
In Green  
Simultaneous  
blinking in Red  
There is a possibility that the interior portion  
has become overcooled.  
Please use the unit within the usage temperature  
parameters (5°C to 35°C).  
Lighting  
In Green  
Alternative  
blinking in Red  
After the treatment, reset the power to ON.  
Blinking in  
Green for Turned  
approx. 3  
seconds  
At least 1 Power ON schedule is saved to the  
projector.  
Please refer to “Schedule Settings” section of User’s  
Manual-Network Guide.  
Turned  
off  
off  
NOTE When the interior portion has become overheated, for safety purposes,  
the projector is automatically shut down, and the indicator lamps may also be  
turned off. In such a case, disconnect the power cord, and wait at least 45 minutes.  
After the projector has sufficiently cooled down, please make confirmation of the  
attachment state of the lamp and lamp cover, and then turn the power on again.  
Shutting the projector down  
Only when the projector can not be turned off by usual  
Shutdown switch  
procedure ( 15), please push the shutdown switch using a  
pin or similar, and disconnect the power plug from the power  
outlet. Before turning it on again, wait at least 10 minutes to  
make the projector cool down enough.  
Resetting all settings  
When it is hard to correct some wrong settings, the FACTORY RESET function of  
SERVICE item in OPTION menu  
FILTER TIME, LAMP TIME, FILTER MESSAGE, NETWORK settings and etc.) to the  
can reset all settings(except LANGUAGE,  
44)  
(
6ꢀ  
factory default.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects  
About the phenomenon confused with a machine defect, check and cope with it  
according to the following table.  
Reference  
page  
Phenomenon  
Cases not involving a machine defect  
The electrical power cord is not plugged in.  
Correctly connect the power cord.  
ꢀꢁ  
The main power source has been interrupted during  
operation such as by a power outage (blackout), etc.  
Please disconnect the power plug from the power outlet,  
and allow the projector to cool down at least 10 minutes,  
then turn the power on again.  
12, 15  
54, 55  
Power does not  
come on.  
Either there is no lamp and/or lamp cover, or either  
of these has not been properly fixed.  
Please turn the power off and disconnect the power plug from  
the power outlet, and allow the projector to cool down at least  
45 minutes. After the projector has sufficiently cooled down,  
please make confirmation of the attachment state of the lamp  
and lamp cover, and then turn the power on again.  
The signal cables are not correctly connected.  
Correctly connect the connection cables.  
ꢀ0  
Signal source does not correctly work.  
Correctly set up the signal source device by referring to the  
manual of the source device.  
Neither sounds  
nor pictures are  
outputted.  
The input changeover settings are mismatched.  
Select the input signal, and correct the settings.  
16, 17  
The signal cables are not correctly connected.  
Correctly connect the audio cables.  
ꢀ0  
The MUTE function is working.  
Restore the sound pressing MUTE or VOLUME button on  
the remote control.  
ꢀ6  
ꢀ6  
Sound does not  
come out.  
The volume is adjusted to an extremely low level.  
Adjust the volume to a higher level using the menu function  
or the remote control.  
The AUDIO/SPEAKER setting is not correct.  
Correctly set the AUDIO/SPEAKER in SETUP menu.  
35  
4, 15  
ꢀ0  
The lens cover is attached.  
Remove the lens cover.  
No pictures are  
displayed.  
The signal cables are not correctly connected.  
Correctly connect the connection cables.  
(continued on next page)  
6ꢁ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects (continued)  
Reference  
page  
Phenomenon  
Cases not involving a machine defect  
The brightness is adjusted to an extremely low level.  
Adjust BRIGHTNESS to a higher level using the menu  
function.  
25, 26  
The computer cannot detect the projector as a plug  
and play monitor.  
Make sure that the computer can detect a plug and play  
monitor using another plug and play monitor.  
No pictures are  
displayed.  
(continued)  
ꢀꢀ  
The BLANK screen is displayed.  
Press BLANK button on the remote control.  
ꢁꢀ  
ꢁꢀ  
The FREEZE function is working.  
Press FREEZE button to restore the screen to normal.  
Video screen  
display freezes.  
Color settings are not correctly adjusted.  
Perform picture adjustments by changing the COLOR  
TEMP, COLOR, TINT and/or COLOR SPACE settings,  
using the menu functions.  
25, 26,  
3ꢀ  
Colors have a  
faded- out  
appearance, or  
Color tone is  
poor.  
COLOR SPACE setting is not suitable.  
Change the COLOR SPACE setting to AUTO, RGB,  
SMPTE240, REC709 or REC601.  
3ꢀ  
The brightness and/or contrast are adjusted to an  
extremely low level.  
Adjust BRIGHTNESS and/or CONTRAST settings to a  
higher level using the menu function.  
25, 26  
Pictures appear  
dark.  
The WHISPER function is working.  
Select NORMAL for WHISPER item in the SETUP menu.  
25, 35  
54, 55  
The lamp is approaching the end of its product  
lifetime.  
Replace the lamp.  
Either the focus and/or horizontal phase settings are  
not properly adjusted.  
Adjust the focus using the focus ring, and/or H PHASE  
using the menu function.  
18, 30  
Pictures appear  
blurry.  
The lens is dirty or misty.  
Clean the lens referring to the section “Caring for the lens”.  
58  
NOTE • Although bright spots or dark spots may appear on the screen, this  
is a unique characteristic of liquid crystal displays, and it does not constitute or  
imply a machine defect.  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Specifications  
Specification  
Item  
Specification  
Product name  
Liquid crystal projector  
1.6 cm (0.63 type)  
Panel size  
Liquid  
Crystal  
Panel  
Drive system TFT active matrix  
Pixels  
786,432 pixels (1024 horizontal x 768 vertical)  
Zoom lens,  
8755G-RJ  
F=1.7 ~ 1.9  
8912-RJ  
F=1.7 ~ 1.9  
Lens  
f = 18.9~ 22.6 mm  
f = 19.5~ 23.4 mm  
(approximately)  
Lamp  
220W UHB  
7 W  
Audio output  
Power supply  
AC 100-120V/3.5A, AC220-240V/1.5A  
320 W  
5 ~ 35°C (Operating)  
Power consumption  
Temperature range  
340 (W) x 117 (H) x 270 (D) mm  
* Not including protruding parts. Please refer to the following figure.  
Size  
Weight (mass)  
approx. 4.0 kg  
Computer input port  
COMPUTER IN1 ................................D-sub 15 pin mini x1  
COMPUTER IN2 ................................D-sub 15 pin mini x1  
Computer output port  
MONITOR OUT ...................................D-sub 15 pin mini x1  
Video input port  
Y, Cb/Pb, Cr/Pr (Component video) ........................ RCA x3  
S-VIDEO................................................... mini DIN 4 pin x1  
VIDEO ..................................................................... RCA x1  
Audio input/output port  
Ports  
AUDIO IN1.....................................................Stereo mini x1  
AUDIO IN2.....................................................Stereo mini x1  
AUDIO IN3............................................................... RCA x2  
AUDIO OUT...................................................Stereo mini x1  
Others  
USB ......................................................................USB-B x1  
CONTROL.................................................... D-sub 9 pin x1  
LAN......................................................................... RJ45 x1  
Lamp:  
456-8755G  
Air filter: MU04951  
Optional parts  
* For more information, please consult your dealer.  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Specifications (continued)  
Y
T T E B R A  
340  
[unit: mm]  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
P8r7oje5c5toGr -RJ/8912-RJ  
User’s Manual (detailed)  
Network Guide  
This manual is only intended to explain Network Functions.  
For safety, operations or any other issues, refer to the Safety Guide or Operating  
Guide.  
WARNING • Before using this product, please read the Safety Guide  
first.  
NOTE • The information in this manual is subject to change without notice.  
• The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in  
this manual.  
• The reproduction, transfer or copy of all or any part of this document is not  
permitted without express written consent.  
Trademark acknowledgement  
• Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.  
• Netscape is a registered trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation.  
• JavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.  
All other trademarks are the properties of their respective owners.  
Contents  
Network Functions ..................................................................2  
Configuring and Controlling the Projector via a Web Browser ...4  
E-mail Alerts ..........................................................................23  
Projector Management using SNMP......................................25  
Event Scheduling...................................................................26  
e-SHOT (Still Image Transfer) Display ..................................29  
Command Control via the Network.......................................31  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Network Functions  
Network Functions  
This projector is equipped with the following network functions.  
Configuring and Controlling the Projector via a Web Browser  
You can change the settings of or control the projector via a network by using a  
web browser from a PC that is connected to the same network.  
(4)  
E-mail Alerts  
The projector can automatically send an alert to specified e-mail addresses when  
the projector requires maintenance or has encountered an error.  
(23)  
Projector Management using SNMP  
This projector is SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) compliant,  
allowing you to monitor it from a remote location using SNMP software. In  
addition, the projector is able to send failure & warning alerts to a specified PC.  
(25)  
Event Scheduling  
You can schedule the projector to perform various functions according to the date  
and time.  
(26)  
e-SHOT (Still Image Transfer) Display  
The projector can display still images that are transferred via the network.  
(29)  
Command Control via the Network  
The projector can be controlled using RS-232C commands over a network.  
(31)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Network Functions  
Before Using the Network Functions…  
To use the network functions of this projector, the projector must be configured to  
suit your network. Consult with your network administrator before connecting the  
projector to your network. Incorrect network configuration of this projector may  
cause problems on your network.  
Connect the gateway (The router/PC that forwards traffic to a destination outside  
of the subnet of the transmitting device) to the LAN port on the projector using a  
CAT-5 cable and configure the following settings.  
If using a network with DHCP enabled:  
The projector’s network settings can be configured automatically when DHCP on  
the NETWORK menu is set to ON. Please refer to DHCP and INFORMATION in  
NETWORK menu ("NETWORK menu" section of the User's Manual - Operating Guide).  
If a fixed / static IP address is required, please configure your projector according  
to the steps in the following section.  
If using a network without DHCP enabled  
or using a fixed IP address on a network with DHCP enabled:  
Configure the following settings on the NETWORK menu ("NETWORK menu"  
section of the User's Manual - Operating Guide).  
ꢁ. DHCP : Set DHCP to OFF (disabled).  
IP ADDRESS : Enter an appropriate IP address for the projector to connect to  
your network.  
ꢀ.  
SUBNET MASK : Enter an appropriate subnet mask for the projector to  
connect to your network.  
3.  
DEFAULT GATEWAY : Enter an appropriate gateway address for the  
projector to connect to your network.  
4.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring and Controlling the Projector via a Web Browser  
Configuring and Controlling the Projector via a Web Browser  
You can adjust or control the projector via a network from a web browser on a PC  
that is connected to the same network.  
NOTE • Internet Explorer 5.5 or later or Netscape 6.2 or later are required.  
• If JavaScript is disabled in your web browser configuration, you must enable  
JavaScript in order to use the projector web pages properly. See the Help files  
for your web browser for details on how to enable JavaScript.  
• If projector is disconnected from network approx. 50 seconds, system will  
automatically log off. Please Re-log on to continue operations via a web  
browser.  
• After you logon, a small, blank window will appear behind the main operation  
window. Please do not close this small, blank window. If this window is closed,  
the system will automatically log off after approx. 50 seconds even if an  
operation is being performed.  
The small, blank window will close when the main operation window is closed.  
• The small, blank window may be considered a pop-up and be blocked if you  
are using Windows XP Service Pack ꢀ, or using other security software.  
If Service Pack ꢀ blocks the window the following message will appear:  
"Pop-up blocked. To see this pop-up or additional options click here..."  
Please select "Temporarily Allow Pop-ups" or "Always Allow Pop-ups From This  
Site..." to allow the window to open.  
You can communicate using SSL (Secure Socket Layer) if you are using  
Windows XP Service Pack ꢀ or earlier versions of Microsoft Windows. Please  
specify “https://” when you enter the IP address of the projector on the web  
browser. You can't communicate the projector using SSL on Windows Vista.  
It is recommended to install all web browser updates to communicate using  
SSL. It is especially recommended that users using Internet Explorer install  
security update Q832894 (MS04-004) or the web browser interface may not be  
displayed correctly.  
And when using an earlier version of Internet Explorer than version 5.5, during  
operations the browser will log out after 50 seconds.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring and Controlling the Projector via a Web Browser  
When configuring or controlling the projector via a web browser, an ID and  
password are required. There are two types of IDs, Administrator and User. The  
following chart describes the differences between User and Administrator IDs.  
Item  
Description  
Administrator  
User  
Displays the projector’s current  
network configuration settings. ( 7)  
Network Information  
Displays and configures network  
Network Settings  
Port Settings  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
settings. ( 8)  
Displays and configures  
communication port settings. ( 9)  
Displays and configures e-mail  
Mail Settings  
addressing settings. ( 10)  
Displays and configures failure &  
Alert Settings  
warning alerts. ( 11)  
Displays and configures schedule  
Schedule Settings  
Date/Time Settings  
settings. ( 13)  
Displays and configures the date and  
time settings. ( 15)  
Displays and configures passwords  
Security Settings  
Projector Control  
Projector Status  
N/A  
and other security settings. ( 17)  
Controls the projector. ( 19)  
Displays and configures the current  
projector status. ( 22)  
Restarts the projector’s network  
Network Restart  
N/A  
connection. ( 22)  
Below are the factory default settings of IDs and passwords for Administrator and  
User.  
Item  
Administrator  
User  
ID  
Password  
<blank>  
Administrator  
User  
<blank>  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring and Controlling the Projector via a Web Browser  
Refer to the following for configuring or controlling the projector via a web browser.  
Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10:  
Fig. ꢁ  
ꢁ) Enter "http://192.168.1.10/" into the  
address bar of the web browser and  
press "Enter" key or click "Go" button.  
The screen in Fig. ꢁ will be displayed.  
2) Enter your ID and password and click  
[Logon].  
If the logon is successful, either the Fig.2 or Fig.3 screen will be displayed.  
Fig. 2 (Logon with Administrator ID)  
Fig. 3 (Logon with User ID)  
main menu  
main menu  
3) Click the desired operation or configuration item on the main menu located on  
the left side of the screen.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring and Controlling the Projector via a Web Browser  
Network Information  
All screen images displayed in this manual are  
screens of a logon using an Administrator ID.  
Any Administrator only functions will not be  
displayed when using a User ID. Refer to the  
descriptions in each table.  
Displays the projector’s current network configuration settings.  
Item  
Description  
Displays the DHCP configuration settings.  
Displays the current IP address.  
Displays the subnet mask.  
DHCP  
IP Address  
Subnet Mask  
Default Gateway  
MAC Address  
Displays the default gateway.  
Displays the MAC address.  
Displays the network firmware time stamp. This information is only  
displayed when logged on using an Administrator ID.  
Firmware Date  
Displays the network firmware version number. This information is  
only displayed when logged on using an Administrator ID.  
Firmware Version  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring and Controlling the Projector via a Web Browser  
Network Settings  
Displays and configures network settings.  
Item  
IP Configuration  
DHCP ON  
Description  
Configures network settings.  
Enables DHCP.  
DHCP OFF  
Disables DHCP.  
IP Address  
Configures the IP address when DHCP is disabled.  
Configures the subnet mask when DHCP is disabled.  
Configures the default gateway when DHCP is disabled.  
Subnet Mask  
Default Gateway  
Configures the name of the projector.  
The length of the Projector Name can be up to 64  
alphanumeric characters. Numbers ‘0-9’ and alphabet ‘a-z’,  
‘A-Z’ and symbols can be used.  
Projector Name  
Configures the location to be referred to when using SNMP.  
The length of the sysLocation can be up to 255 alphanumeric  
characters. Only numbers ‘0-9’ and alphabet ‘a-z’, ‘A-Z’ can  
be used.  
sysLocation (SNMP)  
Configures the contact information to be referred to when  
using SNMP.  
The length of the sysContact can be up to 255 alphanumeric  
characters. Only numbers ‘0-9’ and alphabet ‘a-z’, ‘A-Z’ can  
be used.  
sysContact (SNMP)  
DNS Server Address  
Configures the DNS server address.  
Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.  
NOTE • The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the  
network connection. When the configuration settings are changed, you must  
restart the network connection. You can restart the network connection by  
clicking [Network Restart] on the main menu.  
• If you connect the projector to an existing network, consult a network  
administrator before setting server addresses.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring and Controlling the Projector via a Web Browser  
Port Settings  
Displays and configures communication port settings.  
Item  
Description  
Network Control Port1  
(Port:23)  
Configures command control port 1 (Port:23).  
Port open  
Click the [Enable] check box to use port 23.  
Click the [Enable] check box when authentication is required  
for this port.  
Authentication  
Network Control Port2  
(Port:9715)  
Configures command control port 2 (Port:9715).  
Port open  
Click the [Enable] check box to use port 9715.  
Click the [Enable] check box when authentication is required  
for this port.  
Authentication  
Image Transfer Port  
(Port:9716)  
Configures the image transfer port (Port:9716).  
Port open  
Click the [Enable] check box to use port 9716.  
Click the [Enable] check box when authentication is required  
for this port.  
Authentication  
SNMP Port  
Port open  
Configures the SNMP port.  
Click the [Enable] check box to use SNMP.  
Configures the destination of the SNMP trap in IP format.  
Configures the SMTP port.  
Trap address  
SMTP Port  
Port open  
Click the [Enable] check box to use the e-mail function.  
Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.  
NOTE • The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the  
network connection. When the configuration settings are changed, you must  
restart the network connection. You can restart the network connection by  
clicking [Network Restart] on the main menu.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring and Controlling the Projector via a Web Browser  
Mail Settings  
Displays and configures e-mail addressing settings.  
Item  
Description  
Click the [Enable] check box to use the e-mail function.  
Configure the conditions for sending e-mail under Alert  
Settings.  
Send mail  
Configures the address of the mail server in IP format.  
• The address allows not only IP address but also domain  
name if the valid DNS server is setup in the Network  
Settings. The maximum length of host or domain name is up  
to 255 characters.  
SMTP Server IP Address  
Configures the sender e-mail address.  
The length of the sender e-mail address can be up to 255  
alphanumeric characters.  
Sender E-mail address  
Configures the e-mail address of up to five recipients. You  
can also specify [TO] or [CC] for each address. The length of  
the recipient e-mail address can be up to 255 alphanumeric  
characters.  
Recipient E-mail address  
Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.  
NOTE You can confirm whether the mail settings work correctly using the  
[Send Test Mail] button. Please enable Send mail setting before clicking [Send  
Test Mail].  
• If you connect the projector to an existing network, consult a network  
administrator before setting server addresses.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring and Controlling the Projector via a Web Browser  
Alert Settings  
Displays and configures failure & warning alert settings.  
Alert Item  
Cover Error  
Description  
The lamp cover has not been properly fixed.  
Fan Error  
The cooling fan is not operating.  
The lamp does not light, and there is a possibility that interior  
portion has become heated.  
Lamp Error  
There is a possibility that the interior portion has become  
heated.  
Temp Error  
Air Flow Error  
The internal temperature is rising.  
Lamp time over.  
Lamp Time Error  
There is a possibility that the interior portion has become  
overcooled.  
Cold Error  
Filter Error  
Other Error  
Filter time over.  
Other error.  
If displaying this error, please contact your dealer.  
Schedule Execution  
Error  
Schedule Execution error. ( 13)  
Lamp Time Alarm  
Filter Time Alarm  
Lamp time over Alarm Time setting.  
Filter time over Alarm Time setting.  
Transition Detector Alarm. ( "OPTION menu" section of the  
User's Manual - Operating Guide)  
Transition Detector  
Alarm  
“CHANGE THE LAMP” is  
displayed.  
“CHANGE THE LAMP” is displayed.  
The power switch is turned on.  
(Off → standby mode)  
Cold Start  
The SNMP access is detected from the invalid SNMP  
community.  
Authentication Failure  
Refer to "Troubleshooting" section of the User's Manual - Operating Guide for  
further detailed explanation of Error except Other Error and Schedule Execution  
Error.  
ꢁꢁ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring and Controlling the Projector via a Web Browser  
Alert Settings (Continued)  
The Alert Items are shown below.  
Setting Item  
Alarm Time  
Description  
Configures the time to alert.  
(Only Lamp Time Alarm and Filter Time Alarm.)  
SNMP Trap  
Send Mail  
Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP trap alerts.  
Click the [Enable] check box to enable e-mail alerts.  
(Except Cold Start and Authentication Failure.)  
Configures the subject line of the e-mail to be sent.  
The length of the subject line can be up to 255 alphanumeric  
characters.  
Mail Subject  
Mail Text  
(Except Cold Start and Authentication Failure.)  
Configures the text of the e-mail to be sent.  
The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric  
characters.  
(Except Cold Start and Authentication Failure.)  
Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.  
NOTE • The trigger of Filter Error e-mail is depending on the FILTER  
MESSAGE setting in the SERVICE item of the OPTION menu which defines  
the period until filter message is displayed on the projector screen. The e-mail  
will be sent when the filter timer exceeds 50, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700  
or 800 hours based on the configuration. No notification e-mail will be sent if the  
FILTER MESSAGE is set to TURN OFF. ( "OPTION menu" section of the User's  
Manual - Operating Guide)  
• Lamp Time Alarm is defined as a threshold for e-mail notification (reminder) of  
the lamp timer. When the lamp hour exceeds this threshold that is configured  
through the Web page, the e-mail will be sent out.  
• Filter Time Alarm is defined as a threshold for e-mail notification (reminder)  
of the filter timer. When the filter hour exceeds this threshold, the e-mail will be  
sent out.  
ꢁꢀ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring and Controlling the Projector via a Web Browser  
Schedule Settings  
Displays and configures schedule settings.  
Item  
Description  
Configures the daily schedule.  
Configures the Sunday schedule.  
Daily  
Sunday  
Monday  
Configures the Monday schedule.  
Tuesday  
Configures the Tuesday schedule.  
Wednesday  
Thursday  
Configures the Wednesday schedule.  
Configures the Thursday schedule.  
Friday  
Configures the Friday schedule.  
Saturday  
Configures the Saturday schedule.  
Specific date No.1  
Specific date No.2  
Specific date No.3  
Specific date No.4  
Specific date No.5  
Configures the specific date (No.1) schedule.  
Configures the specific date (No.2) schedule.  
Configures the specific date (No.3) schedule.  
Configures the specific date (No.4) schedule.  
Configures the specific date (No.5) schedule.  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring and Controlling the Projector via a Web Browser  
Schedule Settings (Continued)  
The daily and weekly event items are shown below.  
Item  
Daily & Weekly Description  
Click the [Enable] check box to enable the schedule.  
Displays the current schedule.  
Schedule  
Schedule List  
The specific date event items are shown below.  
Item  
Specific date (No.1-5) Description  
Click the [Enable] check box to enable specific date (No.1-5)  
schedule.  
Schedule  
Date (Month/Day)  
Schedule List  
Configures the month and day.  
Displays the current specific date (No.1-5) schedule.  
Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.  
To add additional functions and events click the [Add] button and set the following  
items.  
Item  
Description  
Time  
Configures the time to execute commands.  
Command  
Parameter  
Configures the commands to be executed.  
Power  
Configures the parameters for power control.  
Input Source  
Configures the parameters for input switching.  
Configures the parameters for display of transfer image data.  
Display Image  
Click the [Register] button to add new commands to the Schedule List.  
Click the [Delete] button to delete commands from the Schedule List.  
NOTE • After the projector is moved, check the date and time set for the  
projector before configuring the schedules. Strong shock may make the date  
(
15)  
and time settings  
get out of tune.  
ꢁ4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring and Controlling the Projector via a Web Browser  
Date/Time Settings  
Displays and configures the date and time settings.  
Item  
Current Date  
Description  
Configures the current date in year/month/day format.  
Configures the current time in hour:minute:second format.  
Current Time  
Click the [ON] check box to enable daylight savings time and  
set the following items.  
Daylight Savings Time  
Start  
Configures the date and time daylight savings time begins.  
Configures the month daylight savings time begins (1~12).  
Month  
Configures the week of the month daylight savings time  
begins (First, 2, 3, 4, Last).  
Week  
Day  
Configures the day of the week daylight savings time begins  
(Sun, Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat).  
Time hour  
minute  
Configures the hour daylight savings time begins (0 ~ 23).  
Configures the minute daylight savings time begins (0 ~ 59).  
Configures the date and time daylight savings time ends.  
Configures the month daylight savings time ends (1 ~ 12).  
End  
Month  
Configures the week of the month daylight savings time ends  
(First, 2, 3, 4, Last).  
Week  
Day  
Configures the day of the week daylight savings time ends  
(Sun, Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat).  
Time hour  
minute  
Configures the hour daylight savings time ends (0 ~ 23).  
Configures the minute daylight savings time ends (0 ~ 59).  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring and Controlling the Projector via a Web Browser  
Date/Time Settings (Continued)  
Item  
Description  
Configures the time difference.  
Time difference  
Set the same time difference as the one set on your PC. If  
unsure, consult your IT manager.  
Click the [ON] check box to retrieve Date and Time  
information from the SNTP server and set the following items.  
SNTP  
Configures the SNTP server address in IP format.  
The address allows not only IP address but also domain name  
SNTP Server IP Address  
Cycle  
if the valid DNS server is setup in the Network Settings. The  
maximum length of host or domain name is up to 255 characters.  
Configures the interval at which to retrieve Date and Time  
information from the SNTP server (hours:minutes).  
Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.  
NOTE  
• The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the  
network connection. When the configuration settings are changed, you must  
restart the network connection. You can restart the network connection by  
clicking [Network Restart] on the main menu.  
If you connect the projector to an existing network, consult a network administrator  
before setting server addresses.  
To enable the SNTP function, the time difference must be set.  
• The projector will retrieve Date and Time information from the time server and  
override time settings when SNTP is enabled.  
The internal clock’s time may not remain accurate. Using SNTP is recommended  
to maintain accurate time.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring and Controlling the Projector via a Web Browser  
Security Settings  
Displays and configures passwords and other security settings.  
Item  
Description  
Administrator authority Configures the Administrator ID and password.  
Configures the Administrator ID.  
The length of the text can be up to 32 alphanumeric  
Administrator ID  
characters.  
Configures the Administrator password.  
The length of the text can be up to 255 alphanumeric  
characters.  
Administrator  
Password  
Re-enter Administrator  
Password  
Re-enter the above password for verification.  
User authority  
Configures the User ID and password.  
Configures the User ID.  
The length of the text can be up to 32 alphanumeric  
characters.  
User ID  
Configures the User password.  
The length of the text can be up to 255 alphanumeric  
characters.  
User Password  
Re-enter User  
Password  
Re-enter the above password for verification.  
ꢁꢂ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring and Controlling the Projector via a Web Browser  
Security Settings (Continued)  
Item  
Description  
Configures the authentication password for the command  
control.  
Network Control  
Configures the authentication password.  
The length of the text can be up to 32 alphanumeric  
characters.  
Authentication  
Password  
Re-enter Authentication  
Password  
Re-enter the above password for verification.  
SNMP  
Configures the community name if SNMP is used.  
Configures the community name.  
The length of the text can be up to 64 alphanumeric  
characters.  
Community Name  
Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.  
NOTE • The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the  
network connection. When the configuration settings are changed, you must  
restart the network connection. You can restart the network connection by  
clicking [Network Restart] on the main menu.  
• Only numbers ‘0-9’ and alphabet ‘a-z’, ‘A-Z’ can be used.  
ꢁꢃ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring and Controlling the Projector via a Web Browser  
Projector Control  
The items shown in the table below can be  
performed using the Projector Control menu.  
Select an item using the up and down arrow keys  
on the PC.  
Most of the items have a submenu.  
Refer to the table below for details.  
NOTE • The setting value may not match with the actual value if the user  
changes the value manually. In that case, please refresh the page by clicking  
[Refresh] button.  
Controls the projector.  
Item  
Description  
Main  
Power  
Turns the power on/off.  
Selects the input source.  
Input Source  
Picture Mode  
Blank On/Off  
Mute  
Selects the picture mode setting.  
Turns Blank on/off.  
Turns Mute on/off.  
Freeze  
Turns Freeze on/off.  
Controls the Magnify setting.  
In some input signal sources, it might stop “Magnify” even  
though it does not reach to maximum setting value.  
The variable range:  
Magnify  
• For a computer signal 0-48  
• For a video, s-video or component video signal 0-16  
Picture  
Brightness  
Contrast  
Adjusts the brightness setting.  
Adjusts the contrast setting.  
Selects the gamma setting.  
Selects the color temperature setting.  
Adjusts the color setting.  
Gamma  
Color Temp  
Color  
Tint  
Adjusts the tint setting.  
Sharpness  
MyMemory Save  
MyMemory Recall  
Adjusts the sharpness setting.  
Saves the MyMemory data.  
Recalls the MyMemory data.  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring and Controlling the Projector via a Web Browser  
Projector Control (Continued)  
Item  
Description  
Image  
Aspect  
Selects the aspect ratio.  
Over Scan  
V Position  
H Position  
H Phase  
Adjusts the over-scan setting.  
Adjusts the vertical position.  
Adjusts the horizontal position.  
Adjusts the horizontal phase.  
Adjusts the horizontal size.  
H Size  
Auto Adjust Execute Performs the automatic adjustment.  
Input  
Progressive  
Selects the progressive setting.  
Video NR  
Selects the video noise reduction setting.  
Selects the color space setting.  
Color Space  
Component  
Selects the COMPONENT port setting.  
Selects the video format setting.  
C-Video Format  
S-Video Format  
Frame Lock  
Selects the s-video format setting.  
Turns the frame lock function on/off.  
Selects the COMPUTER IN1 input signal type.  
Selects the COMPUTER IN2 input signal type.  
Computer in-1  
Computer in-2  
Setup  
Auto Keystone Execute Performs the automatic keystone distortion correction.  
Keystone  
Adjusts the keystone distortion setting.  
Selects the whisper mode.  
Whisper  
Mirror  
Selects the mirror status.  
Volume  
Adjusts the volume setting.  
Speaker  
Turns the built-in speaker on/off.  
Audio-Computer1  
Audio-Computer2  
Audio-Video  
Audio-S-Video  
Audio-Component  
Assigns the AUDIO-COMPUTER IN1 input port.  
Assigns the AUDIO-COMPUTER IN2 input port.  
Assigns the AUDIO-VIDEO input port.  
Assigns the AUDIO-S-VIDEO input port.  
Assigns the AUDIO-COMPONENT input port.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring and Controlling the Projector via a Web Browser  
Projector Control (Continued)  
Item  
Description  
Screen  
Language  
Selects the language for the OSD.  
Adjusts the vertical Menu position.  
Adjusts the horizontal Menu position.  
Selects the Blank mode.  
Menu Position V  
Menu Position H  
Blank  
Startup  
Selects the start-up screen mode.  
Turns MyScreen lock function on/off.  
Turns the message function on/off.  
MyScreen Lock  
Message  
Option  
Auto Search  
Auto Keystone  
Auto on  
Turns the automatic signal search function on/off.  
Turns the automatic keystone distortion correction function on/off  
Turns the AUTO ON function on/off.  
.
Configures the timer to shut off the projector when no signal  
is detected.  
Auto off  
Assigns the function for the MY BUTTON1 button on the  
included remote control.  
My Button-1  
My Button-2  
Assigns the function for the MY BUTTON2 button on the  
included remote control.  
Remote Freq. Normal Enables/Disables remote control signal frequency normal.  
Remote Freq. High Enables/Disables remote control signal frequency high.  
ꢀꢁ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring and Controlling the Projector via a Web Browser  
Projector Status  
Displays and configures the current projector status.  
Item  
Error Status  
Description  
Displays the current error status.  
Lamp Time  
Filter Time  
Power Status  
Input Status  
Blank On/Off  
Mute  
Displays the usage time for the current lamp.  
Displays the usage time for the current filter.  
Displays the current power status.  
Displays the current input signal source.  
Displays the current Blank on/off status.  
Displays the current Mute on/off status.  
Displays the current Freeze status.  
Freeze  
Network Restart  
Restarts the projector’s network connection.  
Item  
Description  
Restarts the projector’s network connection in order to  
activate new configuration settings.  
Restart  
NOTE Restarting requires you to re-logon in order to further control or configure  
the projector via a web browser. Wait ꢁ minute or more after clicking [Restart] button  
to log on again in order to further control or configure the projector via a web browser.  
• A link to the logon screen ( 6 : Fig. ꢁ) is displayed after restarting the  
projector's network connection if the DHCP is set to ON.  
Logoff  
When [Logoff] is clicked, the logon screen is displayed ( 6 : Fig. ꢁ).  
ꢀꢀ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-mail Alerts  
E-mail Alerts  
The projector can automatically send an alert message to the specified e-mail  
addresses when the projector detects a certain condition that is requiring  
maintenance or detected an error.  
NOTE • Up to five e-mail addresses can be specified.  
• The projector may be not able to send e-mail if the projector suddenly loses  
power.  
Mail Settings  
To use the projector’s e-mail alert function please configure the following items  
through a web browser.  
Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10:  
ꢁ) Enter "http://192.168.1.10/" into the address bar of the web browser.  
2) Enter the Administrator ID and password and click [Logon].  
3) Click [Port Settings] on the main menu.  
4) Click the [Enable] check box to open the SMTP Port.  
5) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.  
NOTE • A Network Restart is required after the SMTP Port configuration  
settings have changed. Click [Network Restart] and configure the following  
items.  
6) Click [Mail Settings] and configure each item. Refer to the Mail Settings  
item in "Configuring and Controlling the Projector via a Web Browser" for  
further information ( 10).  
ꢂ) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.  
NOTE • Click the [Send Test Mail] button in Mail Settings to confirm that the  
e-mail settings are correct. The following mail will be delivered to the specified  
addresses.  
Subject line : Test Mail  
Text : Send Test Mail  
<Projector name>  
Date  
<Testing date>  
Time  
<Testing time>  
IP Address  
<Projector IP address>  
MAC Address <Projector MAC address>  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-mail Alerts  
Mail Settings (Continued)  
8) Configure the Failure/Warning Alerts via E-mail settings. Click [Alert Settings]  
on the main menu.  
9) Select and configure each alert item. Refer to Alert Settings in "Configuring  
and Controlling the Projector via a Web Browser" for further information (  
11).  
10) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.  
Failure/Warning e-mails are formatted as follows:  
Subject line : <Mail title>  
<Projector name>  
Text  
: <Mail text>  
Date  
<Failure/Warning date>  
<Failure/Warning time>  
<Projector IP address>  
Time  
IP Address  
MAC Address <Projector MAC address>  
ꢀ4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Projector Management using SNMP  
Projector Management using SNMP  
The SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) enables to manage the  
projector information, which is a failure or warning status, from the computer on  
the network. The SNMP management software will be required on the computer  
to use this function.  
NOTE • It is recommended that SNMP functions be carried out by a network  
administrator.  
• SNMP management software must be installed on the computer to monitor  
the projector via SNMP.  
SNMP Settings  
Configure the following items via a web browser to use SNMP.  
Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10:  
ꢁ) Enter "http://192.168.1.10/" into the address bar of the web browser.  
2) Enter the Administrator ID and password and click [Logon].  
3) Click [Port Settings] on the main menu.  
4) Click the [Enable] check box to open the SNMP Port.  
Set the IP address to send the SNMP trap to when a Failure/Warning occurs.  
NOTE • A Network Restart is required after the SNMP Port configuration  
settings have been changed. Click [Network Restart] and configure the  
following items.  
5) Click [Security Settings] on the main menu.  
6) Click [SNMP] and set the Community Name on the screen that is displayed.  
NOTE • A Network Restart is required after the Community Name has been  
changed. Click [Network Restart] and configure the following items.  
7) Configure the settings for Trap transmission of Failures/Warnings. Click  
[Alert Settings] on the main menu and select the Failure/Warning item to be  
configured.  
ꢃ) Click the [Enable] check box to send out the SNMP trap for Failures/Warnings.  
Clear the [Enable] check box when SNMP trap transmission is not required.  
9) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Event Scheduling  
Event Scheduling  
The scheduling function enables to setup scheduled events including power on /  
power off. It enables to be “self-management” projector.  
NOTE You can schedule the following control events: Power ON/OFF, Input  
Source and Transferred Image Display.  
• The power on / off event has the lowest priority among the all events that are  
defined at the same time.  
• There are 3 types of Scheduling, 1) Daily 2) Weekly 3) Specific date ( 27).  
• The priority for scheduled events is as follows 1) Specific date 2) Weekly  
3) Daily.  
• Up to five specific dates are available for scheduled events. Priority is given to  
those with the lower numbers when more than one event has been scheduled  
for the same date and time (e.g., ‘Specific date No. 1’ has priority over ‘Specific  
date No. ꢀ’ and so on).  
• Be sure to set the date and time before enabling scheduled events ( 28).  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Event Scheduling  
Schedule Settings  
Schedule settings can be configured from a web browser.  
Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10:  
ꢁ) Enter "http://192.168.1.10/" into the address bar of the web browser.  
2) Enter the Administrator ID and password and click [Logon].  
3) Click [Schedule Settings] on the main menu and select the required schedule  
item. For example, if you want to perform the command every Sunday, please  
select the [Sunday].  
4) Click the [Enable] check box to enable scheduling.  
5) Enter the date (month/day) for specific date scheduling.  
6) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.  
ꢂ) Click [Add] to create new event. After configure the time, command and  
parameters, click [Register] to add the new event. To return the previous  
page, click [Cancel] button.  
ꢃ) Click the [Delete] button when you want to delete a schedule.  
There are three types of scheduling.  
1) Daily: Perform the specified operation at a specified time every day.  
2) Weekly (Sunday ~ Saturday): Perform the specified operation at the specified  
time on a specified day of the week.  
3) Specific date: Perform the specified operation on the specified date and time.  
NOTE • In Standby mode the POWER indicator will flash green for approx. 3  
seconds when at least ꢁ “Power ON” schedule is saved.  
• When the schedule function is used, the power cord must be connected to  
the projector and the outlet and the power switch must be turned on, [ | ]. The  
schedule function does not work when the power switch is turned off, [ ¡ ] or  
the breaker in a room is tripped. The POWER indicator will lights orange or  
green when the projector is receiving the power.  
ꢀꢂ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Event Scheduling  
Date/Time Settings  
The Date/Time setting can be adjusted via a web browser.  
Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10:  
ꢁ) Enter "http://192.168.1.10/" into the address bar of the web browser.  
Enter the Administrator ID and password and click [Logon].  
ꢀ) Click [Date/Time Settings] on the main menu and configure each item.  
Refer to the Date/Time Settings item in "Configuring and Controlling the  
Projector via a Web Browser" for further information.  
3) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.  
NOTE • A Network Restart is required after the Daylight Savings Time or  
SNTP configuration settings have been changed.  
• The battery for the built in clock may be dead if the clock loses time even  
when the date and time have been set correctly. Replace the battery by  
following the instructions on replacing the battery.  
("Internal clock battery" section of the User's Manual - Operating Guide)  
The internal clock’s time may not remain accurate. Using SNTP is recommended  
to maintain accurate time.  
ꢀꢃ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
e-SHOT (Still Image Transfer) Display  
e-SHOT (Still Image Transfer) Display  
The projector can display a still image that is transferred via the network.  
Communication Port  
The following port is used for e-SHOT.  
TCP #9716  
NOTE • e-SHOT is not available via communication ports (TCP #23 and TCP  
#9715) ( 9) which are used for the command control.  
e-SHOT (Still Image Transfer) Settings  
Configure the following items from a web browser when e-SHOT is used.  
Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10:  
ꢁ) Enter "http://192.168.1.10/" into the address bar of the web browser.  
2) Enter the Administrator ID and password and  
click [Logon].  
3) Click [Port Settings] on the main menu.  
4) Click the [Enable] check box to open the  
Image Transfer Port (Port: 9716). Click the  
[Enable] check box for the [Authentication]  
setting when authentication is required,  
otherwise clear the check box.  
5) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
e-SHOT (Still Image Transfer) Display  
e-SHOT (Still Image Transfer) Settings (Continued)  
When the authentication setting is enabled, the following settings are required.  
6) Click [Security Settings] on the main menu.  
ꢂ) Select [Network Control] and enter the desired authentication password.  
ꢃ) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.  
NOTE • The Authentication Password will be the same for Network Control  
Port1 (Port: 23), Network Control Port2 (Port: 9715), and Image Transfer  
Port (Port: 9716).  
• The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the network  
connection. When the configuration settings are changed, you must restart  
the network connection. You can restart the network connection by clicking  
[Network Restart] on the main menu.  
e-SHOT (Still Image Transfer) Transmission  
e-SHOT transmission requires an exclusive application for your PC. You can  
download it from the Hitachi web site. Refer to the manual for the application for  
instructions.  
To display the transferred image, select the e-SHOT item in the NETWORK menu  
("NETWORK menu" section of the User's Manual - Operating Guide).  
NOTE • It is possible to allocate the image file up to 4 in the maximum.  
• The image file also can be displayed by using schedule function from the web  
browser. Refer to "Event Scheduling" ( 26) in detail.  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Control via the Network  
Command Control via the Network  
You can configure and control the projector via the network using RS-232C  
commands.  
Communication Port  
The following two ports are assigned for the command control.  
TCP #23  
TCP #9715  
NOTE • Command control is not available via communication port (TCP #9716)  
(
9) that is used for the e-SHOT transmission function.  
Command Control Settings  
Configure the following items from a web browser when command control is used.  
Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10:  
ꢁ) Enter "http://192.168.1.10/" into the address bar of the web browser.  
2) Enter the Administrator ID and password and click [Logon].  
3) Click [Port Settings] on the main menu.  
4) Click the [Enable] check box to open Network Control Port1 (Port: 23) to use  
TCP #23. Click the [Enable] check box for the [Authentication] setting when  
authentication is required, otherwise clear the check box.  
5) Click the [Enable] check box to open Network Control Port2 (Port: 9715) to  
use TCP #9715. Click the [Enable] check box for the [Authentication] setting  
when authentication is required, otherwise clear the check box.  
6) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Control via the Network  
Command Control Settings (Continued)  
When the authentication setting is enabled, the following settings are required.  
(17)  
ꢂ) Click [Security Settings] on the main menu.  
ꢃ) Click [Network Control] and enter the desired authentication password.  
9) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.  
NOTE • The Authentication Password will be the same for Network Control  
Port1 (Port: 23), Network Control Port2 (Port: 9715), and Image Transfer  
Port (Port: 9716).  
• The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the network  
connection. When the configuration settings are changed, you must restart  
the network connection. You can restart the network connection by clicking  
[Network Restart] on the main menu.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Control via the Network  
Command Format  
Command formats differ among the different communication ports.  
● TCP #23  
You can use the RS-232C commands without any changes. The reply data  
format is the same as the RS-232C commands. However, the following reply  
will be sent back in the event of authentication failure when authentication is  
enabled.  
<Reply in the event of an authentication error>  
Reply  
Error code  
0x04 0x00  
0x1F  
● TCP #9715  
Send Data format  
The following formatting is added to the header (0x02), Data length (0x0D),  
Checksum (1byte) and Connection ID (1 byte) of the RS-232C commands.  
Data  
length  
Connection  
ID  
Header  
RS-232Ccommand  
Checksum  
0x02  
0x0D  
13 bytes  
ꢁ byte  
ꢁ byte  
Header  
Data length  
→ 0x02, Fixed  
→ RS-232C commands byte length (0x0D, Fixed)  
RS-232C commands → RS-232C commands that start with 0xBE 0xEF (13 bytes)  
Check Sum  
→ This is the value to make zero on the addition of the  
lower ꢃ bits from the header to the checksum.  
→ Random value from 0 to 255 (This value is attached to  
the reply data)  
Connection ID  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Control via the Network  
Command Format (Continued)  
Reply Data format  
The connection ID (the data is same as the connection ID data on the sending  
data format) is attached to the RS-232C commands reply data.  
<ACK reply>  
Connection  
Reply  
ID  
0x06  
ꢁ byte  
<NAK reply>  
Connection  
ID  
Reply  
0x15  
ꢁ byte  
<Error reply>  
Connection  
ID  
Reply  
0x1C  
Error code  
ꢀ bytes  
ꢁ byte  
<Data reply>  
Connection  
ID  
Reply  
Data  
0x1D  
ꢀ bytes  
ꢁ byte  
<Projector busy reply>  
Connection  
ID  
Reply  
Status code  
ꢀ bytes  
0x1F  
ꢁ byte  
<Authentication error reply>  
Authentication  
Reply  
Connection  
ID  
Error code  
0x1F  
0x04  
0x00  
ꢁ byte  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Control via the Network  
Automatic Connection Break  
The TCP connection will be automatically disconnected after there is no  
communication for 30 seconds after being established.  
Authentication  
The projector does not accept commands without authentication success  
when authentication is enabled. The projector uses a challenge response type  
authentication with an MD5 (Message Digest 5) algorithm.  
When the projector is using a LAN, a random 8 bytes will be returned if  
authentication is enabled. Bind this received 8 bytes and the Authentication  
Password and digest this data with the MD5 algorithm and add this in front of the  
commands to send.  
Following is a sample if the Authentication Password is set to “password” and the  
random 8 bytes are “a572f60c”.  
ꢁ) Select the projector.  
2) Receive the random 8 bytes “a572f60c” from the projector.  
3) Bind the random 8 bytes “a572f60c” and the Authentication Password  
“password” and it becomes “a572f60cpassword”.  
4) Digest this bind “a572f60cpassword” with MD5 algorithm.  
It will be “e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde”.  
5) Add this “e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde” in front of the commands and  
send the data.  
Send “e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde”+command.  
6) When the sending data is correct, the command will be performed and the  
reply data will be returned. Otherwise, an authentication error will be returned.  
NOTE • As for the transmission of the second or subsequent commands, the  
authentication data can be omitted when the same connection.  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Projector  
8755G-RJ/8912-RJ  
User's Manual (detailed)  
Technical  
Example of PC signal  
Resolution (H x V) H. frequency (kHz) V. frequency (Hz)  
Rating  
Signal mode  
720 x 400  
640 x 480  
640 x 480  
640 x 480  
640 x 480  
800 x 600  
800 x 600  
800 x 600  
800 x 600  
800 x 600  
832 x 624  
1024 x 768  
1024 x 768  
1024 x 768  
1024 x 768  
1152 x 864  
1280 x 960  
1280 x 1024  
1280 x 1024  
1280 x 1024  
1600 x 1200  
1280 x 768  
1400 x 1050  
37.9  
31.5  
37.9  
37.5  
43.3  
35.2  
37.9  
48.1  
46.9  
53.7  
49.7  
48.4  
56.5  
60.0  
68.7  
67.5  
60.0  
64.0  
80.0  
91.1  
75.0  
47.7  
65.2  
85.0  
59.9  
72.8  
75.0  
85.0  
56.3  
60.3  
72.2  
75.0  
85.1  
74.5  
60.0  
70.1  
75.0  
85.0  
75.0  
60.0  
60.0  
75.0  
85.0  
60.0  
60.0  
60.0  
VESA  
VESA  
VESA  
VESA  
VESA  
VESA  
VESA  
VESA  
VESA  
VESA  
TEXT  
VGA (60Hz)  
VGA (72Hz)  
VGA (75Hz)  
VGA (85Hz)  
SVGA (56Hz)  
SVGA (60Hz)  
SVGA (72Hz)  
SVGA (75Hz)  
SVGA (85Hz)  
Mac 16” mode  
XGA (60Hz)  
XGA (70Hz)  
XGA (75Hz)  
XGA (85Hz)  
1152 x 864 (75Hz)  
1280 x 960 (60Hz)  
SXGA (60Hz)  
SXGA (75Hz)  
SXGA (85Hz)  
UXGA (60Hz)  
W-XGA (60Hz)  
SXGA+ (60Hz)  
VESA  
VESA  
VESA  
VESA  
VESA  
VESA  
VESA  
VESA  
VESA  
VESA  
VESA  
VESA  
NOTE • Be sure to check jack type, signal level, timing and resolution  
before connecting this projector to a PC.  
• Some PCs may have multiple display screen modes. Use of some of these  
modes will not be possible with this projector.  
• Depending on the input signal, full-size display may not be possible in some  
cases. Refer to the number of display pixels above.  
• Although the projector can display signals with resolution up to UXGA  
(1600x1200), the signal will be converted to the projector’s panel resolution  
before being displayed. The best display performance will be achieved if the  
resolutions of the input signal and projector panel are identical.  
• Automatically adjustment may not function correctly with some input signals.  
• The image may not be displayed correctly when the input sync signal is a  
composite sync or a sync on G.  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Initial set signals  
Initial set signals  
The following signals are used for the initial settings. The signal timing of some  
PC models may be different. In such case, adjust the items V POSITION and H  
POSITION in IMAGE menu.  
Back porch (B)  
Front porch (D)  
Back porch (b)  
Front porch (d)  
Active video (C)  
Active video (c)  
Data  
H. Sync.  
Data  
V. Sync.  
Sync (A)  
Sync (a)  
Horizontal signal timing (μs)  
Vertical signal timing (lines)  
computer  
computer  
Signal  
Signal  
(A)  
2.0  
3.8  
ꢀ.3  
2.0  
ꢀ.6  
(B)  
(C)  
(D)  
(a)  
3
2
3
3
3
2
4
6
3
3
3
6
6
3
3
(b)  
42  
33  
28  
ꢀ6  
25  
22  
23  
23  
2ꢀ  
27  
39  
29  
29  
28  
36  
(c)  
(d)  
ꢀ0  
9
37  
TEXT  
3.0 20.3 ꢀ.0  
ꢀ.9 25.4 0.6  
4.ꢀ 20.3 0.8  
3.8 20.3 0.5  
2.2 ꢀ7.8 ꢀ.6  
3.6 22.2 0.7  
2.2 20.0 ꢀ.0  
ꢀ.3 ꢀ6.0 ꢀ.ꢀ  
3.2 ꢀ6.2 0.3  
2.7 ꢀ4.2 0.6  
3.9 ꢀ4.5 0.6  
2.5 ꢀ5.8 0.4  
ꢀ.9 ꢀ3.7 0.3  
2.2 ꢀ3.0 0.2  
2.2 ꢀ0.8 0.5  
TEXT  
400  
480  
480  
480  
480  
600  
600  
600  
600  
600  
624  
768  
768  
768  
768  
VGA (60Hz)  
VGA (72Hz)  
VGA (75Hz)  
VGA (85Hz)  
SVGA (56Hz) 2.0  
SVGA (60Hz) 3.2  
SVGA (72Hz) 2.4  
SVGA (75Hz) ꢀ.6  
SVGA (85Hz) ꢀ.ꢀ  
Mac ꢀ6" mode ꢀ.ꢀ  
VGA (60Hz)  
VGA (72Hz)  
VGA (75Hz)  
VGA (85Hz)  
SVGA (56Hz)  
SVGA (60Hz)  
SVGA (72Hz)  
SVGA (75Hz)  
SVGA (85Hz)  
Mac ꢀ6" mode  
XGA (60Hz)  
XGA (70Hz)  
XGA (75Hz)  
XGA (85Hz)  
3
3
XGA (60Hz)  
XGA (70Hz)  
XGA (75Hz)  
XGA (85Hz)  
2.ꢀ  
ꢀ.8  
ꢀ.2  
ꢀ.0  
ꢀꢀ52 x 864  
(75Hz)  
ꢀ280 x 960  
(60Hz)  
ꢀꢀ52 x 864  
(75Hz)  
ꢀ280 x 960  
(60Hz)  
ꢀ.2  
ꢀ.0  
2.4 ꢀ0.7 0.6  
3
3
32  
36  
864  
960  
2.9  
ꢀꢀ.9  
0.9  
SXGA (60Hz) ꢀ.0  
SXGA (75Hz) ꢀ.ꢀ  
SXGA (85Hz) ꢀ.0  
UXGA (60Hz) ꢀ.2  
W-XGA (60Hz) ꢀ.7  
SXGA+ (60Hz) ꢀ.2  
2.3  
ꢀ.8  
ꢀ.4  
ꢀ.9  
ꢀꢀ.9  
9.5  
8.ꢀ  
9.9  
0.4  
0.ꢀ  
0.4  
0.4  
SXGA(60Hz)  
SXGA (75Hz)  
SXGA (85Hz)  
UXGA (60Hz)  
W-XGA (60Hz)  
SXGA+ (60Hz)  
3
3
3
3
3
3
38 ꢀ024  
38 ꢀ024  
44 ꢀ024  
46 ꢀ200  
2.5 ꢀ6.0 0.8  
2.0 ꢀꢀ.4 0.7  
23  
768  
33 ꢀ050  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connection to the ports  
Connection to the ports  
LAN  
B
C
A
A
B
C
COMPUTER IN1, COMPUTER IN2, MONITOR OUT  
D-sub ꢀ5pin mini shrink jack  
• Video signal: RGB separate, Analog, 0.7Vp-p, 75Ω  
terminated (positive)  
ꢀꢀ ꢀꢄ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢂ ꢀꢁ  
ꢀꢆ  
• H/V. sync. Signal: TTL level (positive/negative)  
• Composite sync. Signal: TTL level  
Pin  
Signal  
Pin  
Signal  
Video Red  
Video Green  
Video Blue  
ꢀ0 Ground  
ꢀꢀ (No connection)  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
: SDA (DDC data)  
ꢀ2  
C
(No connection)  
Ground  
,
: (No connection)  
ꢀ3 H. sync / Composite sync.  
ꢀ4 V. sync.  
Ground Red  
Ground Green  
Ground Blue  
(No connection)  
A
B
: SCL (DDC clock)  
ꢀ5  
-
C
,
: (No connection)  
-
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connection to the ports (continued)  
LAN  
F
E
D
G
H
D
E
F
COMPONENT VIDEO  
Y,  
Pb/Cb,  
Pr/Cr  
RCA jack x3  
• System: 525i(480i), 525p(480p), 625i(576i), 750p(720p),ꢀꢀ25i(ꢀ080i)  
Port  
Y
Signal  
Component video Y, 1.0±0.1Vp-p, 75Ω terminator with composite  
Component video Pb/Cb, 0.7±0.1Vp-p, 75Ω terminator  
Component video Pr/Cr, 0.7±0.1Vp-p, 75Ω terminator  
Pb/Cb  
Pr/Cr  
G
S-VIDEO  
2
3
4
Mini DIN 4pin jack  
Pin  
Signal  
Color signal 0.286Vp-p (NTSC, burst), 75Ω terminator  
Color signal 0.300Vp-p (PAL/SECAM, burst) 75Ω terminator  
Brightness signal, 1.0Vp-p, 75Ω terminator  
2
3
4
Ground  
Ground  
H
VIDEO  
RCA jack  
• System: NTSC, PAL, SECAM, PAL-M, PAL-N, NTSC4.43  
• 1.0±0.1Vp-p, 75Ω terminator  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connection to the ports (continued)  
LAN  
M
I
J
K
L
I
J
AUDIO IN1, AUDIO IN2  
Ø3.5 stereo mini jack  
• 200 mVrms 47kΩ terminator  
K
L
AUDIO IN3 L,  
R
RCA jack x2  
• 200 mVrms 47kΩ terminator  
M
AUDIO OUT  
Ø3.5 stereo mini jack  
• 200 mVrms 1kΩ output impedance  
To input SCART RGB signal;  
ex.:  
㪭㫀㪻㪼㫆  
SCART connector  
(jack)  
㪘㫌㪻㫀㫆㩷㪣  
㪘㫌㪻㫀㫆㩷㪩  
RCA plugs  
SCART cable  
(plug)  
To input SCART RGB signal to the projector, use a SCART to RCA cable.  
Connect the plugs refer to above ex.. For more reference, please consult your dealer.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connection to the ports (continued)  
LAN  
P
O
N
4
3
2
N
USB  
USB B type jack  
Pin  
Signal  
+5V  
2
- Data  
+ Data  
Ground  
3
4
O
CONTROL  
D-sub 9pin plug  
9
8
7
6
• About the details of RS-232C communication,  
please refer to the following page.  
5
4
3
2
Pin  
Signal  
Pin  
Signal  
Pin  
Signal  
2
3
(No connection)  
4
5
6
(No connection)  
Ground  
7
8
9
RTS  
CTS  
RD  
TD  
(No connection)  
(No connection)  
P
LAN  
RJ-45 jack  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Pin  
Signal  
TX +  
Pin  
4
Signal  
Pin  
7
Signal  
-
-
-
-
-
2
3
TX -  
RX +  
5
6
8
-
RX -  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RS-232C Communication  
RS-232C Communication  
2
3
4
5
2
3
4
5
6
6
8
8
7
9
7
9
CONTROL port  
of the projector  
RS-232C cable (cross)  
RS-232C port  
of the computer  
- (ꢀ)  
RD (2)  
TD (3)  
- (4)  
(ꢀ) CD  
(2) RD  
(3) TD  
(4) DTR  
(5) GND  
(6) DSR  
(7) RTS  
(8) DTS  
(9) RI  
GND (5)  
- (6)  
RTS (7)  
CTS (8)  
- (9)  
Connecting the cable  
ꢀ. Turn off the projector and the computer.  
Connect the CONTROL port of the projector with a RS-232C port of  
the computer by a RS-232C cable (cross). Use the cable that fulfills the  
specification shown in the previous page.  
2.  
Turn the computer on, and after the computer has started up turn the  
projector on.  
3.  
Communications setting  
ꢀ9200bps, 8Nꢀ  
1. Protocol  
Consist of header (7 bytes) + command data (6 bytes)  
2. Header  
BE + EF + 03 + 06 + 00 + CRC_low + CRC_high  
CRC_low: Lower byte of CRC flag for command data  
CRC_high: Upper byte of CRC flag for command data  
3. Command data  
Command data chart  
byte_0  
byte_ꢀ  
high  
byte_2  
byte_3  
high  
byte_4  
Setting code  
low  
byte_5  
high  
Action  
Type  
low  
low  
Action (byte_0 - ꢀ)  
Action  
Classification  
Content  
2
4
5
6
Set  
Get  
Increment  
Decrement  
Execute  
Change setting to desired value.  
Read projector internal setup value.  
Increment setup value by ꢀ.  
Decrement setup value by ꢀ.  
Run a command.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RS-232C Communication (continued)  
Requesting projector status (Get command)  
(ꢀ) Send the following request code from the PC to the projector.  
Header + Command data (‘02H’ + ‘00H’ + type (2 bytes) + ‘00H’ + ‘00H’)  
(2) The projector returns the response code ‘1DH’ + data (2 bytes) to the PC.  
Changing the projector settings (Set command)  
(ꢀ) Send the following setting code from the PC to the projector.  
Header + Command data (‘01H’ + ‘00H’ + type (2 bytes) + setting code (2 bytes))  
(2) The projector changes the setting based on the above setting code.  
(3) The projector returns the response code ‘06H’ to the PC.  
Using the projector default settings (Reset Command)  
(ꢀ) The PC sends the following default setting code to the projector.  
Header + Command data (‘06H’ + ‘00H’ + type (2 bytes) + ‘00H’ + ‘00H’)  
(2) The projector changes the specified setting to the default value.  
(3) The projector returns the response code ‘06H’ to the PC.  
Increasing the projector setting value (Increment command)  
(ꢀ) The PC sends the following increment code to the projector.  
Header + Command data (‘04H’ + ‘00H’ + type (2 bytes) + ‘00H’ + ‘00H’)  
(2) The projector increases the setting value on the above setting code.  
(3) The projector returns the response code ‘06H’ to the PC.  
Decreasing the projector setting value (Decrement command)  
(ꢀ) The PC sends the following decrement code to the projector.  
Header + Command data (‘05H’ + ‘00H’ + type (2 bytes) + ‘00H’ + ‘00H’)  
(2) The projector decreases the setting value on the above setting code.  
(3) The projector returns the response code ‘06H’ to the PC.  
When the projector cannot understand the received command  
When the projector cannot understand the received command, the error code ‘15H’  
is sent back to the PC.  
Sometimes the projector cannot properly receive the command. In such a case,  
the command is not executed and the error code ‘15H’ is sent back to the PC. If  
this error code is returned, send the same command again.  
When the projector cannot execute the received command.  
When the projector cannot execute the received command, the error code ‘1CH’ +  
‘xxxxH’ is sent back to the PC.  
When the data length is greater than indicated by the data length code, the  
projector ignore the excess data code. Conversely when the data length is shorter  
than indicated by the data length code, an error code will be returned to the PC.  
NOTE • Operation cannot be guaranteed when the projector receives an undefined  
command or data.  
• Provide an interval of at least 40ms between the response code and any other code.  
• The projector outputs test data when the power supply is switched ON, and when the  
lamp is lit. Ignore this data.  
• Commands are not accepted during warm-up.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RS-232C Communication (continued)  
RS-232C communication command table  
CommandꢀData  
Namesꢀ  
OperationꢀType  
Header  
CRC  
Action  
Type  
SettingꢀCode  
Power  
Set  
Turnꢀoff  
Turnꢀon  
Get  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
03  
03  
03  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
2AꢀꢀD3  
BAꢀꢀD2  
19ꢀꢀD3  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ60  
00ꢀꢀ60  
00ꢀꢀ60  
00ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
[Exampleꢀreturn]ꢀ  
00ꢀꢀ00ꢀ  
[Off]ꢀ  
01ꢀꢀ00ꢀ  
[On]ꢀ  
02ꢀꢀ00ꢀ  
[Coolꢀdown]  
InputꢀSource  
ErrorꢀStatus  
Set  
COMPUTER1  
COMPUTER2  
COMPONENT  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
BEꢀꢀEF  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
06ꢀꢀ00  
FEꢀꢀD2  
3EꢀꢀD0  
AEꢀꢀD1  
9EꢀꢀD3  
6EꢀꢀD3  
CDꢀꢀD2  
D9ꢀꢀD8  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ20  
00ꢀꢀ20  
00ꢀꢀ20  
00ꢀꢀ20  
00ꢀꢀ20  
00ꢀꢀ20  
20ꢀꢀ60  
00ꢀꢀ00  
04ꢀꢀ00  
05ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
Get  
Get  
[Exampleꢀreturn]ꢀ  
00ꢀꢀ00ꢀ  
[Normal]ꢀ  
04ꢀꢀ00ꢀ  
[Temp error]  
08ꢀ00ꢀ  
01ꢀꢀ00ꢀ  
02ꢀꢀ00ꢀ  
[Fanꢀerror]ꢀ  
06ꢀꢀ00ꢀ  
03ꢀꢀ00ꢀ  
[Coverꢀerror]ꢀ  
05ꢀꢀ00ꢀ  
[Lampꢀerror]ꢀ  
07ꢀꢀ00ꢀ  
[Air flow error]  
09ꢀ00ꢀ  
(Filterꢀmissingꢀerror)ꢀ (InnerꢀSencerꢀerror)  
[Lamp time error]  
10ꢀ00ꢀ  
[Cold error]ꢀ  
[Filterꢀerror]ꢀ  
BRIGHTNESS  
Get  
BEꢀꢀEF  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
89ꢀꢀD2  
EFꢀꢀD2  
3EꢀꢀD3  
58ꢀꢀD3  
FDꢀꢀD3  
9BꢀꢀD3  
4AꢀꢀD2  
A4ꢀꢀD2  
23ꢀꢀF6  
B3ꢀꢀF7  
E3ꢀꢀF4  
E3ꢀꢀEF  
73ꢀꢀEE  
83ꢀꢀEE  
E3ꢀꢀC7  
10ꢀꢀF6  
02ꢀꢀ00  
04ꢀꢀ00  
05ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
04ꢀꢀ00  
05ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
03ꢀꢀ20  
00ꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
04ꢀꢀ00  
20ꢀꢀ00  
21ꢀꢀ00  
22ꢀꢀ00  
40ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
Increment  
Decrement  
Execute  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
03ꢀꢀ20  
ꢀ03ꢀꢀ20  
00ꢀꢀ70  
04ꢀꢀ20  
04ꢀꢀ20  
04ꢀꢀ20  
01ꢀꢀ70  
BAꢀꢀ30  
BAꢀꢀ30  
BAꢀꢀ30  
BAꢀꢀ30ꢀ  
BAꢀꢀ30ꢀ  
BAꢀꢀ30  
BAꢀꢀ30  
BAꢀꢀ30  
BRIGHTNESSꢀReset  
CONTRAST  
Get  
Increment  
Decrement  
Execute  
CONTRASTꢀReset  
PICTUREꢀMODE  
Set  
NORMAL  
CINEMA  
DYNAMIC  
BOARD(BLACK)  
BOARD(GREEN)  
WHITEBOARD  
DAYTIME  
Get  
[Exampleꢀreturn]ꢀ  
00ꢀꢀ00ꢀ  
01ꢀꢀ00ꢀ  
[Cinema]ꢀ  
04ꢀꢀ00ꢀ  
[Dynamic]ꢀ  
10ꢀꢀ00ꢀ  
[Custom]ꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀ  
[Normal]ꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ20ꢀꢀ00ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ21ꢀꢀ00ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ22ꢀꢀ00ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ40ꢀꢀ00  
ꢀꢀꢀ[BOARD(BLACK)ꢀ]ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ[BOARD(GREEN)]ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ[WHITEBOARD]ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ[DAYꢀTIME]  
GAMMA  
Set  
#1ꢀDEFAULT  
#1ꢀCUSTOM  
#2ꢀDEFAULT  
#2ꢀCUSTOM  
#3ꢀDEFAULT  
#3ꢀCUSTOM  
#4ꢀDEFAULT  
#4ꢀCUSTOM  
#5ꢀDEFAULT  
#5ꢀCUSTOM  
#6ꢀDEFAULT  
#6ꢀCUSTOM  
Get  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
07ꢀE9  
07ꢀFD  
97ꢀE8  
97ꢀFC  
67ꢀE8  
67ꢀFC  
F7ꢀE9  
F7ꢀFD  
C7ꢀEB  
C7ꢀFF  
57ꢀEA  
57ꢀFE  
F4ꢀF0  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00ꢀ  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
A1ꢀꢀ30  
A1ꢀꢀ30  
A1ꢀꢀ30  
A1ꢀꢀ30  
A1ꢀꢀ30  
A1ꢀꢀ30  
A1ꢀꢀ30  
A1ꢀꢀ30  
A1ꢀꢀ30  
A1ꢀꢀ30  
A1ꢀꢀ30  
A1ꢀꢀ30  
A1ꢀꢀ30  
20ꢀꢀ00  
10ꢀꢀ00  
21ꢀꢀ00  
11ꢀꢀ00  
22ꢀꢀ00  
12ꢀꢀ00  
23ꢀꢀ00  
13ꢀꢀ00  
24ꢀꢀ00  
14ꢀꢀ00  
25ꢀꢀ00  
15ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
9
(continued on next page)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RS-232C Communication (continued)  
RS-232C communication command table (continued)  
CommandꢀData  
Namesꢀ  
OperationꢀType  
Header  
CRC  
Action  
Type  
SettingꢀCode  
UserꢀGammaꢀPattern Set  
Off  
9ꢀstepꢀgrayꢀscale  
15ꢀstepsꢀgrayꢀscale  
Ramp  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
FBꢀꢀFA  
6BꢀꢀFB  
9BꢀꢀFB  
0BꢀꢀFA  
C8ꢀꢀFA  
08ꢀꢀFE  
6EꢀꢀFE  
BFꢀꢀFF  
F4ꢀꢀFF  
92ꢀꢀFF  
43ꢀꢀFE  
B0ꢀꢀFF  
D6ꢀꢀFF  
07ꢀꢀFE  
4CꢀꢀFE  
2AꢀꢀFE  
FBꢀꢀFF  
38ꢀꢀFF  
5EꢀꢀFF  
8FꢀꢀFE  
C4ꢀꢀFE  
A2ꢀꢀFE  
73ꢀꢀFF  
80ꢀꢀFE  
E6ꢀꢀFE  
37ꢀꢀFF  
7CꢀꢀFF  
1AꢀꢀFF  
CBꢀꢀFE  
0BꢀꢀF5  
CBꢀꢀF8  
9BꢀꢀF4  
5BꢀꢀF9  
6BꢀꢀF4  
ABꢀꢀF9  
3BꢀꢀF2  
FBꢀꢀFF  
ABꢀꢀF3  
6BꢀꢀFE  
5BꢀꢀF3  
9BꢀꢀFE  
C8ꢀꢀF5  
34ꢀꢀF4  
52ꢀꢀꢀF4  
83ꢀꢀꢀF5  
70ꢀꢀꢀF4  
16ꢀꢀꢀF4  
C7ꢀꢀꢀF5  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
04ꢀꢀ00  
05ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
04ꢀꢀ00  
05ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
04ꢀꢀ00  
05ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
04ꢀꢀ00  
05ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
04ꢀꢀ00  
05ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
04ꢀꢀ00  
05ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
04ꢀꢀ00  
05ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
04ꢀꢀ00  
05ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
04ꢀꢀ00  
05ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
04ꢀꢀ00  
05ꢀꢀ00  
80ꢀꢀ30  
80ꢀꢀ30  
80ꢀꢀ30  
80ꢀꢀ30  
80ꢀꢀ30  
90ꢀꢀ30  
90ꢀꢀ30  
90ꢀꢀ30  
91ꢀꢀ30  
91ꢀꢀ30  
91ꢀꢀ30  
92ꢀꢀ30  
92ꢀꢀ30  
92ꢀꢀ30  
93ꢀꢀ30  
93ꢀꢀ30  
93ꢀꢀ30  
94ꢀꢀ30  
94ꢀꢀ30  
94ꢀꢀ30  
95ꢀꢀ30  
95ꢀꢀ30  
95ꢀꢀ30  
96ꢀꢀ30  
96ꢀꢀ30  
96ꢀꢀ30  
97ꢀꢀ30  
97ꢀꢀ30  
97ꢀꢀ30  
B0ꢀꢀ30  
B0ꢀꢀ30  
B0ꢀꢀ30  
B0ꢀꢀ30  
B0ꢀꢀ30  
B0ꢀꢀ30  
B0ꢀꢀ30  
B0ꢀꢀ30  
B0ꢀꢀ30  
B0ꢀꢀ30  
B0ꢀꢀ30  
B0ꢀꢀ30  
B0ꢀꢀ30  
B1ꢀꢀ30  
B1ꢀꢀ30  
B1ꢀꢀ30  
B2ꢀꢀ30  
B2ꢀꢀ30  
B2ꢀꢀ30  
00ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
03ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
03ꢀꢀ00  
13ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
12ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
11ꢀꢀ00  
08ꢀꢀ00  
18ꢀꢀ00  
09ꢀꢀ00  
19ꢀꢀ00  
0Aꢀꢀ00  
1Aꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
Get  
UserꢀGammaꢀPointꢀ1  
UserꢀGammaꢀPointꢀ2  
UserꢀGammaꢀPointꢀ3  
UserꢀGammaꢀPointꢀ4  
UserꢀGammaꢀPointꢀ5  
UserꢀGammaꢀPointꢀ6  
UserꢀGammaꢀPointꢀ7  
UserꢀGammaꢀPointꢀ8  
Get  
Increment  
Decrement  
Get  
Increment  
Decrement  
Get  
Increment  
Decrement  
Get  
Increment  
Decrement  
Get  
Increment  
Decrement  
Get  
Increment  
Decrement  
Get  
Increment  
Decrement  
Get  
Increment  
Decrement  
HIGH  
COLORꢀTEMP  
Set  
CUSTOM-1ꢀ(HIGH)  
MID  
CUSTOM-2ꢀ(MID)  
LOW  
CUSTOM-3ꢀ(LOW)  
Hi-BRIGHT-1  
CUSTOM-4ꢀ(Hi-BRIGHT-1)  
Hi-BRIGHT-2  
CUSTOM-5ꢀ(Hi-BRIGHT-2)  
Hi-BRIGHT-3  
CUSTOM-6ꢀ(Hi-BRIGHT-3)  
Get  
COLORꢀTEMPꢀGAINꢀR  
COLORꢀTEMPꢀGAINꢀG  
Get  
Increment  
Decrement  
Get  
Increment  
Decrement  
(continued on next page)  
ꢀ0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RS-232C Communication (continued)  
RS-232C communication command table (continued)  
CommandꢀData  
Namesꢀ  
OperationꢀType  
Header  
CRC  
Action  
Type  
SettingꢀCode  
COLORꢀTEMPꢀGAINꢀB  
Get  
Increment  
Decrement  
Get  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
8CꢀꢀF5  
EAꢀꢀF5  
3BꢀꢀF4  
04ꢀꢀF5  
62ꢀꢀF5  
B3ꢀꢀF4  
40ꢀꢀF5  
26ꢀꢀF5  
F7ꢀꢀF4  
BCꢀꢀF4  
DAꢀꢀF4  
0BꢀꢀF5  
B5ꢀꢀ72  
D3ꢀꢀ72  
02ꢀꢀ73  
80ꢀꢀD0  
49ꢀꢀ73  
2Fꢀꢀ73  
FEꢀꢀ72  
7CꢀꢀD1  
F1ꢀꢀ72  
97ꢀꢀ72  
46ꢀꢀ73  
C4ꢀꢀD0  
0EꢀꢀD7  
9EꢀꢀD6  
6EꢀꢀD6  
FEꢀꢀD7  
F2ꢀꢀD6  
62ꢀꢀD7  
92ꢀꢀD7  
02ꢀꢀD6  
4Aꢀꢀ72  
DAꢀꢀ73  
2Aꢀꢀ73  
79ꢀꢀ72  
26ꢀꢀ72  
D6ꢀꢀ72  
46ꢀꢀ73  
85ꢀꢀ73  
9EꢀꢀD0  
0EꢀꢀD1  
CEꢀꢀD6  
FEꢀꢀD1  
5EꢀꢀDD  
ADꢀꢀD0  
02ꢀꢀ00  
04ꢀꢀ00  
05ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
04ꢀꢀ00  
05ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
04ꢀꢀ00  
05ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
04ꢀꢀ00  
05ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
04ꢀꢀ00  
05ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
04ꢀꢀ00  
05ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
04ꢀꢀ00  
05ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
B3ꢀꢀ30  
B3ꢀꢀ30  
B3ꢀꢀ30  
B5ꢀꢀ30  
B5ꢀꢀ30  
B5ꢀꢀ30  
B6ꢀꢀ30  
B6ꢀꢀ30  
B6ꢀꢀ30  
B7ꢀꢀ30  
B7ꢀꢀ30  
B7ꢀꢀ30  
02ꢀꢀ22  
02ꢀꢀ22  
02ꢀꢀ22  
0Aꢀꢀ70  
03ꢀꢀ22  
03ꢀꢀ22  
03ꢀꢀ22  
0Bꢀꢀ70  
01ꢀꢀ22  
01ꢀꢀ22  
01ꢀꢀ22  
09ꢀꢀ70  
14ꢀꢀ20  
14ꢀꢀ20  
14ꢀꢀ20  
14ꢀꢀ20  
15ꢀꢀ20  
15ꢀꢀ20  
15ꢀꢀ20  
15ꢀꢀ20  
07ꢀꢀ22  
07ꢀꢀ22  
07ꢀꢀ22  
07ꢀꢀ22  
06ꢀꢀ22  
06ꢀꢀ22  
06ꢀꢀ22  
06ꢀꢀ22  
08ꢀꢀ20  
08ꢀꢀ20  
08ꢀꢀ20  
08ꢀꢀ20  
08ꢀꢀ20  
08ꢀꢀ20  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
03ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
03ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
03ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
09ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
10ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
COLORꢀTEMPꢀ  
OFFSETꢀR  
Increment  
Decrement  
Get  
COLORꢀTEMPꢀ  
OFFSETꢀG  
Increment  
Decrement  
Get  
COLORꢀTEMPꢀ  
OFFSETꢀB  
Increment  
Decrement  
Get  
COLORꢀ  
Increment  
Decrement  
Execute  
Get  
COLORꢀReset  
TINT  
Increment  
Decrement  
Execute  
Get  
TINTꢀReset  
SHARPNESS  
Increment  
Decrement  
Execute  
1
SHARPNESSꢀReset  
MYꢀMEMORYꢀLoad Set  
2
3
4
MYꢀMEMORYꢀSave Set  
1
2
3
4
PROGRESSIVE  
VIDEOꢀNR  
Set  
Set  
Set  
TURNꢀOFF  
TV  
FILM  
Get  
LOW  
MID  
HIGH  
Get  
ASPECT  
4:3  
16:9  
14:9  
SMALL  
NORMAL  
Get  
(continued on next page)  
ꢀꢀ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RS-232C Communication (continued)  
RS-232C communication command table (continued)  
CommandꢀData  
Namesꢀ  
OperationꢀType  
Header  
CRC  
Action  
Type  
SettingꢀCode  
OVERꢀSCAN  
Get  
Increment  
Decrement  
Execute  
Get  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
91ꢀꢀ70  
F7ꢀꢀ70  
26ꢀꢀ71  
ECꢀꢀD9  
0Dꢀꢀ83  
6Bꢀꢀ83  
BAꢀꢀ82  
E0ꢀꢀD2  
F1ꢀꢀ82  
97ꢀꢀ82  
46ꢀꢀ83  
1CꢀꢀD3  
49ꢀꢀ83  
2Fꢀꢀ83  
FEꢀꢀ82  
B5ꢀꢀ82  
D3ꢀꢀ82  
02ꢀꢀ83  
68ꢀꢀD2  
91ꢀꢀD0  
0Eꢀꢀ72  
9Eꢀꢀ73  
6Eꢀꢀ73  
FEꢀꢀ72  
CEꢀꢀ70  
3Dꢀꢀ72  
4AꢀꢀD7  
DAꢀꢀD6  
79ꢀꢀD7  
A2ꢀꢀ70  
C2ꢀꢀ74  
52ꢀꢀ75  
52ꢀꢀ70  
62ꢀꢀ77  
C2ꢀꢀ71  
32ꢀꢀ74  
31ꢀꢀ76  
E6ꢀꢀ70  
86ꢀꢀ74  
16ꢀꢀ75  
16ꢀꢀ70  
26ꢀꢀ77  
86ꢀꢀ71  
76ꢀꢀ74  
75ꢀꢀ76  
CBꢀꢀD6  
5BꢀꢀD7  
F8ꢀꢀD6  
02ꢀꢀ00  
04ꢀꢀ00  
05ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
04ꢀꢀ00  
05ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
04ꢀꢀ00  
05ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
04ꢀꢀ00  
05ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
04ꢀꢀ00  
05ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀ00  
09ꢀꢀ22  
09ꢀꢀ22  
09ꢀꢀ22  
27ꢀꢀ70  
00ꢀꢀ21  
00ꢀꢀ21  
00ꢀꢀ21  
02ꢀꢀ70  
01ꢀꢀ21  
01ꢀꢀ21  
01ꢀꢀ21  
03ꢀꢀ70  
03ꢀꢀ21  
03ꢀꢀ21  
03ꢀꢀ21  
02ꢀꢀ21  
02ꢀꢀ21  
02ꢀꢀ21  
04ꢀꢀ70  
0Aꢀꢀ20  
04ꢀꢀ22  
04ꢀꢀ22  
04ꢀꢀ22  
04ꢀꢀ22  
04ꢀꢀ22  
04ꢀꢀ22  
17ꢀ20  
17ꢀ20  
17ꢀ20  
11ꢀꢀ22  
11ꢀꢀ22  
11ꢀꢀ22  
11ꢀꢀ22  
11ꢀꢀ22  
11ꢀꢀ22  
11ꢀꢀ22  
11ꢀꢀ22  
12ꢀꢀ22  
12ꢀꢀ22  
12ꢀꢀ22  
12ꢀꢀ22  
12ꢀꢀ22  
12ꢀꢀ22  
12ꢀꢀ22  
12ꢀꢀ22  
14ꢀꢀ30  
14ꢀꢀ30  
14ꢀꢀ30  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
03ꢀꢀ00  
04ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
0Aꢀꢀ00  
04ꢀꢀ00  
05ꢀꢀ00  
09ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
08ꢀꢀ00  
07ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
0Aꢀꢀ00  
04ꢀꢀ00  
05ꢀꢀ00  
09ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
08ꢀꢀ00  
07ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
OVERꢀSCANꢀReset  
VꢀPOSITION  
Increment  
Decrement  
Execute  
Get  
VꢀPOSITIONꢀReset  
HꢀPOSITION  
Increment  
Decrement  
Execute  
Get  
HꢀPOSITIONꢀReset  
HꢀPHASE  
Increment  
Decrement  
Get  
HꢀSIZE  
Increment  
Decrement  
Execute  
Execute  
AUTO  
HꢀSIZEꢀReset  
AUTOꢀADJUST  
COLORꢀSPACE  
Set  
Set  
RGB  
SMPTE240  
REC709  
REC601  
Get  
COMPONENT  
COMPONENT  
SCARTꢀRGB  
Get  
01ꢀ00  
02ꢀ00  
C-VIDEOꢀFORMAT Set  
AUTO  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
NTSC  
PAL  
SECAM  
NTSC4.43  
M-PAL  
N-PAL  
Get  
S-VIDEOꢀFORMAT  
Set  
AUTO  
NTSC  
PAL  
SECAM  
NTSC4.43  
M-PAL  
N-PAL  
Get  
FRAMEꢀLOCK  
Set  
TURNꢀOFF  
TURNꢀON  
Get  
(continued on next page)  
ꢀ2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RS-232C Communication (continued)  
RS-232C communication command table (continued)  
CommandꢀData  
Names  
OperationꢀType  
Header  
CRC  
Action  
Type  
SettingꢀCode  
COMPUTERꢀIN1  
Set  
Set  
SYNCꢀONꢀGꢀON  
SYNCꢀONꢀGꢀOFF  
Get  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
CEꢀD6  
5EꢀD7  
0DꢀD6  
32ꢀꢀD7  
A2ꢀꢀD6  
F1ꢀꢀD7  
B9ꢀꢀD3  
DFꢀꢀD3  
0EꢀꢀD2  
08ꢀꢀD0  
E5ꢀꢀD1  
01ꢀ00  
01ꢀ00  
02ꢀ00  
01ꢀ00  
01ꢀ00  
02ꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
04ꢀꢀ00  
05ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
10ꢀ20  
10ꢀ20  
10ꢀ20  
11ꢀ20  
11ꢀ20  
11ꢀ20  
07ꢀꢀ20  
07ꢀꢀ20  
07ꢀꢀ20  
0Cꢀꢀ70  
0Dꢀꢀ20  
03ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
03ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
COMPUTERꢀIN2  
KEYSTONEꢀV  
SYNCꢀONꢀGꢀON  
SYNCꢀONꢀGꢀOFF  
Get  
Get  
Increment  
Decrement  
Execute  
KEYSTONEꢀVꢀReset  
AUTOꢀKEYSTONEꢀ  
EXECUTE  
Execute  
WHISPER  
Set  
Set  
NORMAL  
WHISPER  
Get  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
3Bꢀꢀ23  
ABꢀꢀ22  
08ꢀꢀ23  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
04ꢀꢀ00  
05ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
04ꢀꢀ00  
05ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
04ꢀꢀ00  
05ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
04ꢀꢀ00  
05ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
04ꢀꢀ00  
05ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ33  
00ꢀꢀ33  
00ꢀꢀ33  
01ꢀꢀ30  
01ꢀꢀ30  
01ꢀꢀ30  
01ꢀꢀ30  
01ꢀꢀ30  
60ꢀꢀ20  
60ꢀꢀ20  
60ꢀꢀ20  
64ꢀꢀ20  
64ꢀꢀ20  
64ꢀꢀ20  
65ꢀꢀ20  
65ꢀꢀ20  
65ꢀꢀ20  
62ꢀꢀ20  
62ꢀꢀ20  
62ꢀꢀ20  
61ꢀꢀ20  
61ꢀꢀ20  
61ꢀꢀ20  
02ꢀꢀ20  
02ꢀꢀ20  
02ꢀꢀ20  
1Cꢀꢀ20  
1Cꢀꢀ20  
1Cꢀꢀ20  
00ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
03ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
MIRROR  
NORMAL  
H:INVERT  
V:INVERT  
H&V:INVERT  
Get  
C7ꢀꢀD2  
57ꢀꢀD3  
A7ꢀꢀD3  
37ꢀꢀD2  
F4ꢀꢀD2  
CDꢀꢀCC  
ABꢀꢀCC  
7AꢀꢀCD  
FDꢀꢀCD  
9BꢀꢀCD  
4AꢀꢀCC  
01ꢀꢀCC  
67ꢀꢀCC  
B6ꢀꢀCD  
75ꢀꢀCD  
13ꢀꢀCD  
C2ꢀꢀCC  
31ꢀꢀCD  
57ꢀꢀCD  
86ꢀꢀCC  
46ꢀꢀD3  
D6ꢀꢀD2  
75ꢀꢀD3  
FEꢀꢀD4  
6EꢀꢀD5  
5DꢀꢀD5  
VOLUME-  
COMPUTER1  
Get  
Increment  
Decrement  
Get  
VOLUME-  
COMPUTER2  
Increment  
Decrement  
Get  
VOLUME-  
COMPONENT  
Increment  
Decrement  
Get  
VOLUME-S-Video  
VOLUME-Video  
MUTE  
Increment  
Decrement  
Get  
Increment  
Decrement  
TURNꢀOFF  
TURNꢀON  
Get  
Set  
Set  
SPEAKER  
TURNꢀON  
TURNꢀOFF  
Get  
(continued on next page)  
ꢀ3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RS-232C Communication (continued)  
RS-232C communication command table (continued)  
CommandꢀData  
Namesꢀ  
OperationꢀType  
Header  
CRC  
Action  
Type  
SettingꢀCode  
AUDIO-COMPUTER1 Set  
AUDIO1  
AUDIO2  
AUDIO3  
Turnꢀoff  
Get  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
6EꢀꢀDC  
9EꢀꢀDC  
0EꢀꢀDD  
FEꢀꢀDD  
CDꢀꢀDD  
5EꢀꢀDD  
AEꢀꢀDD  
3EꢀꢀDC  
CEꢀꢀDC  
FDꢀꢀDC  
A2ꢀꢀDC  
52ꢀꢀDC  
C2ꢀꢀDD  
32ꢀꢀDD  
01ꢀꢀDD  
D6ꢀꢀDD  
26ꢀꢀDD  
B6ꢀꢀDC  
46ꢀꢀDC  
75ꢀꢀDC  
92ꢀꢀDD  
62ꢀꢀDD  
F2ꢀꢀDC  
02ꢀꢀDC  
31ꢀꢀDC  
FFꢀꢀ3D  
6Fꢀꢀ3C  
CCꢀ3D  
03ꢀꢀ3C  
93ꢀꢀ3D  
30ꢀꢀ3C  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
30ꢀꢀ20  
30ꢀꢀ20  
30ꢀꢀ20  
30ꢀꢀ20  
30ꢀꢀ20  
34ꢀꢀ20  
34ꢀꢀ20  
34ꢀꢀ20  
34ꢀꢀ20  
34ꢀꢀ20  
35ꢀꢀ20  
35ꢀꢀ20  
35ꢀꢀ20  
35ꢀꢀ20  
35ꢀꢀ20  
32ꢀꢀ20  
32ꢀꢀ20  
32ꢀꢀ20  
32ꢀꢀ20  
32ꢀꢀ20  
31ꢀꢀ20  
31ꢀꢀ20  
31ꢀꢀ20  
31ꢀꢀ20  
31ꢀꢀ20  
30ꢀꢀ26  
30ꢀꢀ26  
30ꢀꢀ26  
31ꢀꢀ26  
31ꢀꢀ26  
31ꢀꢀ26  
01ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
03ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
03ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
03ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
03ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
03ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
AUDIO-COMPUTER2 Set  
AUDIO-COMPONENT Set  
AUDIO1  
AUDIO2  
AUDIO3  
Turnꢀoff  
Get  
AUDIO1  
AUDIO2  
AUDIO3  
Turnꢀoff  
Get  
AUDIO-S-VIDEO  
AUDIO-VIDEO  
Set  
Set  
AUDIO1  
AUDIO2  
AUDIO3  
Turnꢀoff  
Get  
AUDIO1  
AUDIO2  
AUDIO3  
Turnꢀoff  
Get  
IRꢀREMOTEꢀFREQ. Set  
NORMAL  
Off  
On  
Get  
IRꢀREMOTEꢀFREQ. Set  
HIGH  
Off  
On  
Get  
(continued on next page)  
ꢀ4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RS-232C Communication (continued)  
RS-232C communication command table (continued)  
CommandꢀData  
Namesꢀ  
OperationꢀType  
Header  
CRC  
Action  
Type  
SettingꢀCode  
LANGUAGE  
Set  
ENGLISH  
FRANÇAIS  
DEUTSCH  
ESPAÑOL  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
F7ꢀꢀD3  
67ꢀꢀD2  
97ꢀꢀD2  
07ꢀꢀD3  
37ꢀꢀD1  
A7ꢀꢀD0  
57ꢀꢀD0  
C7ꢀꢀD1  
37ꢀꢀD4  
A7ꢀꢀD5  
37ꢀꢀDE  
57ꢀꢀD5  
C7ꢀꢀD4  
F7ꢀꢀD6  
67ꢀꢀD7  
97ꢀꢀD7  
07ꢀꢀD6  
C4ꢀꢀD3  
04ꢀꢀD7  
62ꢀꢀD7  
B3ꢀꢀD6  
DCꢀꢀC6  
40ꢀꢀD7  
26ꢀꢀD7  
F7ꢀꢀD6  
A8ꢀꢀC7  
FBꢀꢀCA  
FBꢀꢀE2  
CBꢀꢀD3  
6BꢀꢀD0  
9BꢀꢀD0  
08ꢀꢀD3  
FBꢀꢀD8  
6BꢀꢀD9  
C8ꢀꢀD8  
CBꢀꢀCB  
0BꢀꢀD2  
9BꢀꢀD3  
38ꢀꢀD2  
3BꢀꢀEF  
ABꢀꢀEE  
08ꢀꢀEF  
8FꢀꢀD6  
1FꢀꢀD7  
BCꢀꢀD6  
B6ꢀꢀD6  
26ꢀꢀD7  
85ꢀꢀD6  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
04ꢀꢀ00  
05ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
04ꢀꢀ00  
05ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
05ꢀꢀ30  
05ꢀꢀ30  
05ꢀꢀ30  
05ꢀꢀ30  
05ꢀꢀ30  
05ꢀꢀ30  
05ꢀꢀ30  
05ꢀꢀ30  
05ꢀꢀ30  
05ꢀꢀ30  
05ꢀꢀ30  
05ꢀꢀ30  
05ꢀꢀ30  
05ꢀꢀ30  
05ꢀꢀ30  
05ꢀꢀ30  
05ꢀꢀ30  
05ꢀꢀ30  
15ꢀꢀ30  
15ꢀꢀ30  
15ꢀꢀ30  
43ꢀꢀ70  
16ꢀꢀ30  
16ꢀꢀ30  
16ꢀꢀ30  
44ꢀꢀ70  
00ꢀꢀ30  
00ꢀꢀ30  
00ꢀꢀ30  
00ꢀꢀ30  
00ꢀꢀ30  
00ꢀꢀ30  
20ꢀꢀ30  
20ꢀꢀ30  
20ꢀꢀ30  
04ꢀꢀ30  
04ꢀꢀ30  
04ꢀꢀ30  
04ꢀꢀ30  
C0ꢀꢀ30  
C0ꢀꢀ30  
C0ꢀꢀ30  
17ꢀꢀ30  
17ꢀꢀ30  
17ꢀꢀ30  
16ꢀꢀ20  
16ꢀꢀ20  
16ꢀꢀ20  
00ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
03ꢀꢀ00  
04ꢀꢀ00  
05ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
07ꢀꢀ00  
08ꢀꢀ00  
09ꢀꢀ00  
10ꢀꢀ00  
0Aꢀꢀ00  
0Bꢀꢀ00  
0Cꢀꢀ00  
0Dꢀꢀ00  
0Eꢀꢀ00  
0Fꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
20ꢀꢀ00  
40ꢀꢀ00  
03ꢀꢀ00  
05ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
20ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
ITALIANO  
NORSK  
NEDERLANDS  
PORTUGUÊS  
SVENSKA  
PУCCKИЙ  
SUOMI  
POLSKI  
TÜRKÇE  
Get  
MENUꢀPOSITIONꢀH  
Get  
Increment  
Decrement  
Execute  
Get  
MENUꢀPOSITIONꢀHꢀReset  
MENUꢀPOSITIONꢀV  
Increment  
Decrement  
Execute  
MyScreen  
ORIGINAL  
BLUE  
MENUꢀPOSITIONꢀVꢀReset  
BLANK  
Set  
WHITE  
BLACK  
Get  
BLANKꢀOn/Off  
STARTꢀUP  
Set  
Set  
TURNꢀOFF  
TURNꢀON  
Get  
MyScreen  
ORIGINAL  
TURNꢀOFF  
Get  
MyScreenꢀLOCK  
MESSAGE  
Set  
Set  
Set  
TURNꢀOFF  
TURNꢀON  
Get  
TURNꢀOFF  
TURNꢀON  
Get  
AUTOꢀSEARCH  
TURNꢀOFF  
TURNꢀON  
Get  
(continued on next page)  
ꢀ5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RS-232C Communication (continued)  
RS-232C communication command table (continued)  
CommandꢀData  
Namesꢀ  
OperationꢀType  
Header  
CRC  
Action  
Type  
SettingꢀCode  
AUTOꢀKEYSTONE  
Set  
Set  
TURNꢀOFF  
TURNꢀON  
Get  
TURNꢀOFF  
TURNꢀON  
Get  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
EAꢀꢀD1  
7AꢀꢀD0  
D9ꢀꢀD1  
3Bꢀ89  
ABꢀ88  
08ꢀ89  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀ00  
01ꢀ00  
02ꢀ00  
0Fꢀꢀ20  
0Fꢀꢀ20  
0Fꢀꢀ20  
20ꢀ31  
20ꢀ31  
20ꢀ31  
00ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀ00  
01ꢀ00  
00ꢀ00  
AUTOꢀON  
AUTOꢀOFF  
Get  
08ꢀꢀ86  
6Eꢀꢀ86  
BFꢀꢀ87  
C2ꢀꢀFF  
58ꢀꢀDC  
C2ꢀꢀF0  
98ꢀꢀC6  
3Aꢀꢀ33  
FAꢀꢀ31  
6Aꢀꢀ30  
5Aꢀꢀ32  
AAꢀꢀ32  
FAꢀꢀ3E  
6Aꢀꢀ3F  
9Aꢀꢀ3F  
0Aꢀꢀ3E  
3Aꢀꢀ3C  
5Aꢀꢀ3D  
CAꢀꢀ3C  
3Aꢀꢀ39  
09ꢀꢀ33  
C6ꢀꢀ32  
06ꢀꢀ30  
96ꢀꢀ31  
A6ꢀꢀ33  
56ꢀꢀ33  
06ꢀꢀ3F  
96ꢀꢀ3E  
66ꢀꢀ3E  
F6ꢀꢀ3F  
C6ꢀꢀ3D  
A6ꢀꢀ3C  
36ꢀꢀ3D  
C6ꢀꢀ38  
F5ꢀꢀ32  
7CꢀꢀD2  
1AꢀꢀD2  
CBꢀꢀD3  
83ꢀꢀD2  
13ꢀꢀD3  
B0ꢀꢀD2  
02ꢀꢀ00  
04ꢀꢀ00  
05ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀ00  
10ꢀꢀ31  
10ꢀꢀ31  
10ꢀꢀ31  
90ꢀꢀ10  
30ꢀꢀ70  
A0ꢀꢀ10  
40ꢀꢀ70  
00ꢀꢀ36  
00ꢀꢀ36  
00ꢀꢀ36  
00ꢀꢀ36  
00ꢀꢀ36  
00ꢀꢀ36  
00ꢀꢀ36  
00ꢀꢀ36  
00ꢀꢀ36  
00ꢀꢀ36  
00ꢀꢀ36  
00ꢀꢀ36  
00ꢀꢀ36  
00ꢀꢀ36  
01ꢀꢀ36  
01ꢀꢀ36  
01ꢀꢀ36  
01ꢀꢀ36  
01ꢀꢀ36  
01ꢀꢀ36  
01ꢀꢀ36  
01ꢀꢀ36  
01ꢀꢀ36  
01ꢀꢀ36  
01ꢀꢀ36  
01ꢀꢀ36  
01ꢀꢀ36  
01ꢀꢀ36  
07ꢀꢀ30  
07ꢀꢀ30  
07ꢀꢀ30  
02ꢀꢀ30  
02ꢀꢀ30  
02ꢀꢀ30  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
04ꢀꢀ00  
05ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
10ꢀꢀ00  
11ꢀꢀ00  
12ꢀꢀ00  
13ꢀꢀ00  
14ꢀꢀ00  
16ꢀꢀ00  
17ꢀꢀ00  
18ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
04ꢀꢀ00  
05ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
10ꢀꢀ00  
11ꢀꢀ00  
12ꢀꢀ00  
13ꢀꢀ00  
14ꢀꢀ00  
16ꢀꢀ00  
17ꢀꢀ00  
18ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
Increment  
Decrement  
Get  
Execute  
Get  
LAMPꢀTIME  
LAMPꢀTIMEꢀReset  
FILTERꢀTIME  
FILERꢀTIMEꢀReset  
MYꢀBUTTON-1  
Execute  
COMPUTER1  
COMPUTER2  
COMPONENT  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
INFORMATION  
AUTOꢀKEYSTONEꢀEXECUTE  
MYꢀMEMORY  
PICTUREꢀMODE  
FILTERꢀRESET  
e-SHOTꢀ  
VOLUMEꢀ+  
VOLUMEꢀ-  
Get  
COMPUTER1  
COMPUTER2  
COMPONENT  
S-VIDEO  
MYꢀBUTTON-2  
VIDEO  
INFORMATION  
AUTOꢀKEYSTONEꢀEXECUTE  
MYꢀMEMORY  
PICTUREꢀMODE  
FILTERꢀRESET  
e-SHOTꢀ  
VOLUMEꢀ+  
VOLUMEꢀ-  
Get  
Get  
Increment  
Decrement  
NORMAL  
FREEZE  
Get  
01ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
04ꢀꢀ00  
05ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
MAGNIFY  
FREEZE  
Set  
ꢀ6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RS-232C Communication (continued)  
RS-232C communication command table (continued)  
CommandꢀData  
Namesꢀ  
OperationꢀType  
Header  
CRC  
Action  
Type  
SettingꢀCode  
e-SHOTꢀ  
Set  
OFF  
IMAGE1  
IMAGE2  
IMAGE3  
IMAGE4  
Get  
Execute  
Execute  
Execute  
Execute  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
BEꢀꢀEF  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
3AꢀꢀC3  
AAꢀꢀC2  
5AꢀꢀC2  
CAꢀꢀC3  
FAꢀꢀC1  
09ꢀꢀC3  
71ꢀꢀC3  
35ꢀꢀC3  
C9ꢀꢀC2  
BDꢀꢀC3  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
06ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ35  
00ꢀꢀ35  
00ꢀꢀ35  
00ꢀꢀ35  
00ꢀꢀ35  
00ꢀꢀ35  
01ꢀꢀ35  
02ꢀꢀ35  
03ꢀꢀ35  
04ꢀꢀ35  
00ꢀꢀ00  
01ꢀꢀ00  
02ꢀꢀ00  
03ꢀꢀ00  
04ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
00ꢀꢀ00  
e-SHOTꢀIMAGE1ꢀDelete  
e-SHOTꢀIMAGE2ꢀDelete  
e-SHOTꢀIMAGE3ꢀDelete  
e-SHOTꢀIMAGE4ꢀDelete  
ꢀ7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Read this Safety Guide first.  
Projector  
User's Manual - Safety Guide  
Thank you for purchasing this projector.  
WARNING • Before using, read this manual to ensure correct usage.  
After reading, store it in a safe place for future reference. Incorrect handling of this  
product could possibly result in personal injury or physical damage. The manufacturer  
assumes no responsibility for any damage caused by mishandling that is beyond normal  
usage defined in this manual.  
NOTE  
• The information in this manual is subject to change without notice.  
• The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in  
this manual.  
• The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or contents is not  
permitted without express written authority.  
About The Symbols  
Various symbols are used in this manual, the user’s manual and on the product  
itself to ensure correct usage, to prevent danger to the user and others, and to  
prevent property damage. The meanings of these symbols are described below.  
It is important that you read these descriptions thoroughly and fully understand  
the contents.  
This symbol indicates information that, if ignored, could  
possibly result in personal injury or even death due to  
incorrect handling.  
WARNING  
This symbol indicates information that, if ignored, could  
result possibly in personal injury or physical damage  
due to incorrect handling.  
CAUTION  
Typical Symbols  
This symbol indicates an additional warning (including cautions). An  
illustration is provided to clarify the contents.  
This symbol indicates a prohibited action. The contents will be clearly  
indicated in an illustration or nearby (the symbol to the left indicates that  
disassembly is prohibited).  
This symbol indicates a compulsory action. The contents will be clearly  
indicated in an illustration or nearby (the symbol to the left indicates that  
the power plug should be disconnected from the power outlet).  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety Precautions  
WARNING  
Never use the projector if a problem should occur.  
Abnormaloperationssuchassmoke,strangeodor,noimage,nosound,ꢁ  
excessivesound,damagedcasingorelementsorcables,penetrationofꢁ  
liquidsꢁorꢁforeignꢁmatter,ꢁetc.ꢁcanꢁcauseꢁaꢁfireꢁorꢁelectricalꢁshock.  
Inꢁsuchꢁcase,ꢁimmediatelyꢁturnꢁoffꢁtheꢁpowerꢁswitchꢁandꢁthenꢁdisconnectꢁtheꢁ  
powerꢁplugꢁfromꢁtheꢁpowerꢁoutlet.ꢁAfterꢁmakingꢁsureꢁthatꢁtheꢁsmokeꢁorꢁodorꢁ  
hasstopped,contactyourdealer.Neverattempttomakerepairsyourselfꢁ  
becauseꢁthisꢁcouldꢁbeꢁdangerous.  
Disconnectꢁtheꢁ  
plugꢁfromꢁtheꢁ  
powerꢁoutlet.  
•ꢁTheꢁpowerꢁoutletꢁshouldꢁbeꢁcloseꢁtoꢁtheꢁprojectorꢁandꢁeasilyꢁaccessible.  
Use special caution for children and pets.  
Incorrecthandlingcouldresultinfire,electricalshock,injury,burnorvisionꢁ  
problem.ꢁ  
Useꢁspecialꢁcautionꢁinꢁhouseholdsꢁwhereꢁchildrenꢁandꢁpetsꢁareꢁpresent.  
Do not insert liquids or foreign object.  
Penetrationꢁofꢁliquidsꢁorꢁforeignꢁobjectsꢁcouldꢁresultꢁinꢁfireꢁorꢁelectricalꢁshock.ꢁ  
Useꢁspecialꢁcautionꢁinꢁhouseholdsꢁwhereꢁchildrenꢁareꢁpresent.  
Ifꢁliquidsꢁorꢁforeignꢁobjectꢁshouldꢁenterꢁtheꢁprojector,ꢁimmediatelyꢁturnꢁoffꢁtheꢁ  
powerꢁswitch,ꢁdisconnectꢁtheꢁpowerꢁplugꢁfromꢁtheꢁpowerꢁoutletꢁandꢁcontactꢁ  
yourꢁdealer.ꢁ  
•ꢁDoꢁnotꢁplaceꢁtheꢁprojectorꢁnearꢁwaterꢁ(ex.ꢁaꢁbathroom,ꢁaꢁbeach,ꢁetc.).  
•ꢁDoꢁnotꢁexposeꢁtheꢁprojectorꢁtoꢁrainꢁorꢁmoisture.ꢁDoꢁnotꢁplaceꢁtheꢁprojectorꢁ  
outdoors.  
•ꢁDoꢁnotꢁplaceꢁflowerꢁvases,ꢁpots,ꢁcups,ꢁcosmetics,ꢁliquidsꢁsuchꢁasꢁwater,ꢁetcꢁ  
onꢁorꢁaroundꢁtheꢁprojector.  
•ꢁDoꢁnotꢁplaceꢁmetals,ꢁcombustibles,ꢁetcꢁonꢁorꢁaroundꢁtheꢁprojector.  
•ꢁToꢁavoidꢁpenetrationꢁofꢁforeignꢁobjects,ꢁdoꢁnotꢁputꢁtheꢁprojectorꢁintoꢁaꢁcaseꢁ  
orbagtogetherwithanythingexcepttheaccessoriesoftheprojector,ꢁ  
signalꢁcablesꢁandꢁconnectors.  
Never disassemble and modify.  
Theꢁprojectorꢁcontainsꢁhighꢁvoltageꢁcomponents.ꢁModificationꢁand/orꢁdisassemblyꢁofꢁ  
theꢁprojectorꢁorꢁaccessoriesꢁcouldꢁresultꢁinꢁfireꢁorꢁelectricalꢁshock.  
•ꢁNeverꢁopenꢁtheꢁcabinet.  
Doꢁnotꢁ  
disassemble.  
•ꢁAskꢁyourꢁdealerꢁtoꢁrepairꢁandꢁcleanꢁinsider.  
Do not give the projector any shock or impact.  
Ifꢁtheꢁprojectorꢁshouldꢁbeꢁshockedꢁand/orꢁbroken,ꢁitꢁcouldꢁresultꢁinꢁanꢁinjury,ꢁ  
andꢁcontinuedꢁuseꢁcouldꢁresultꢁinꢁfireꢁorꢁelectricalꢁshock.ꢁ  
Ifꢁtheꢁprojectorꢁisꢁshocked,ꢁimmediatelyꢁturnꢁoffꢁtheꢁpowerꢁswitch,ꢁdisconnectꢁ  
theꢁpowerꢁplugꢁfromꢁtheꢁpowerꢁoutletꢁandꢁcontactꢁyourꢁdealer.  
Do not place the projector on an unstable surface.  
Ifꢁtheꢁprojectorꢁshouldꢁbeꢁdroppedꢁand/orꢁbroken,ꢁitꢁcouldꢁresultꢁinꢁanꢁinjury,ꢁ  
andꢁcontinuedꢁuseꢁcouldꢁresultꢁinꢁfireꢁorꢁelectricalꢁshock.  
•ꢁDoꢁnotꢁplaceꢁtheꢁprojectorꢁonꢁanꢁunstable,ꢁslantꢁorꢁvibrantꢁsurfaceꢁsuchꢁasꢁ  
aꢁwobblyꢁorꢁinclinedꢁstand.  
•ꢁUseꢁtheꢁcasterꢁbrakesꢁplacingꢁtheꢁprojectorꢁonꢁaꢁstandꢁwithꢁcasters.  
Donotplacetheprojectorinthesideupposition,thelensuppositionorꢁ  
theꢁlensꢁdownꢁposition.  
Inthecaseofaceilinginstallationorthelike,contactyourdealerbeforeꢁ  
installation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety Precautions (continued)  
WARNING  
Be cautious of High temperatures of the projector.  
Highꢁtemperaturesꢁareꢁgeneratedꢁwhenꢁtheꢁlampꢁisꢁlit.ꢁItꢁcouldꢁresultꢁinꢁfireꢁorꢁ  
burn.ꢁUseꢁspecialꢁcautionꢁinꢁhouseholdsꢁwhereꢁchildrenꢁareꢁpresent.ꢁ  
Doꢁnotꢁtouchꢁaboutꢁtheꢁlens,ꢁairꢁfansꢁandꢁventilationꢁopeningsꢁduringꢁuseꢁorꢁ  
immediatelyꢁafterꢁuse,ꢁtoꢁpreventꢁaꢁburn.ꢁTakeꢁcareꢁofꢁventilation.  
•ꢁKeepꢁaꢁspaceꢁofꢁꢂ0ꢁcmꢁorꢁmoreꢁbetweenꢁtheꢁsidesꢁandꢁotherꢁobjectsꢁsuchꢁ  
asꢁwalls.  
•ꢁDoꢁnotꢁplaceꢁtheꢁprojectorꢁonꢁaꢁmetallicꢁtableꢁorꢁanythingꢁweakꢁinꢁheat.  
•ꢁDoꢁnotꢁplaceꢁanythingꢁaboutꢁtheꢁlens,ꢁairꢁfansꢁandꢁventilationꢁopeningsꢁofꢁ  
theꢁprojector.  
•ꢁNeverꢁblockꢁtheꢁairꢁfanꢁandꢁventilationꢁopenings.ꢁ  
•ꢁDoꢁnotꢁcoverꢁtheꢁprojectorꢁwithꢁaꢁtablecloth,ꢁetc.  
•ꢁDoꢁnotꢁplaceꢁtheꢁprojectorꢁonꢁaꢁcarpetꢁorꢁbedding.  
Never look through the lens or openings when the lamp is on.  
Theꢁpowerfulꢁlightꢁcouldꢁadverselyꢁaffectꢁvision.ꢁ  
Useꢁspecialꢁcautionꢁinꢁhouseholdsꢁwhereꢁchildrenꢁareꢁpresent.  
Use only the correct power cord and the correct power outlet.  
Incorrectꢁpowerꢁsupplyꢁcouldꢁresultꢁinꢁfireꢁorꢁelectricalꢁshock.ꢁ  
Useonlythecorrectpoweroutletdependingontheindicationontheꢁ  
projectorꢁandꢁtheꢁsafetyꢁstandard.ꢁ  
•ꢁTheꢁenclosedꢁpowerꢁcordꢁmustꢁbeꢁusedꢁdependingꢁonꢁtheꢁpowerꢁoutletꢁtoꢁ  
beꢁused.ꢁ  
Be cautious of the power cord connection.  
Incorrectꢁconnectionꢁofꢁtheꢁpowerꢁcordꢁcouldꢁresultꢁinꢁfireꢁorꢁelectricalꢁshock.ꢁ  
•ꢁDoꢁnotꢁtouchꢁtheꢁpowerꢁcordꢁwithꢁaꢁwetꢁhand.  
•ꢁCheckꢁthatꢁtheꢁconnectingꢁportionꢁofꢁtheꢁpowerꢁcordꢁisꢁcleanꢁ(withꢁnoꢁdust),ꢁ  
beforeꢁusing.ꢁUseꢁaꢁsoftꢁandꢁdryꢁclothꢁtoꢁcleanꢁtheꢁpowerꢁplug.ꢁ  
Insertthepowerplugintoapoweroutletfirmly.ꢁAvoidusingaloose,ꢁ  
unsoundꢁoutletꢁorꢁcontactꢁfailure.  
Be sure to connect with ground wire.  
ConnectꢁtheꢁgroundꢁterminalꢁofꢁACꢁinletꢁofꢁthisꢁunitꢁwithꢁtheꢁgroundꢁterminalꢁ  
providedatthebuildingusingthecorrectpowercord;otherwise,fireorꢁ  
electricꢁshockꢁcanꢁresult.ꢁ  
Surelyꢁconnectꢁ  
theꢁgroundꢁwire.  
•ꢁDon’tꢁtakeꢁtheꢁcoreꢁofꢁpowerꢁcordꢁaway.ꢁ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety Precautions (continued)  
WARNING  
Be careful in handling the light source lamp.  
Theprojectorusesahigh-pressuremercuryglasslampmadeofglass.ꢁ  
Thelampcanbreakwithaloudbang,orburnout.Whenthebulbbursts,ꢁ  
itispossibleforshardsofglasstoflyintothelamphousing,andforgasꢁ  
containingꢁmercuryꢁtoꢁescapeꢁfromꢁtheꢁprojector’sꢁventꢁholes.ꢁ  
Please carefully read the section “Lamp”.  
Be careful in handling the power cord and external connection  
cables.  
Ifyoukeepusingadamagedthepowercordorcables,itcancauseafireꢁ  
orelectricalshock.Donotapplytoomuchheat,pressureortensiontotheꢁ  
powerꢁcordꢁandꢁcables.  
Ifꢁtheꢁpowerꢁcordꢁorꢁcablesꢁisꢁdamagedꢁ(exposedꢁorꢁbrokenꢁcoreꢁwires,ꢁetc.),ꢁ  
contactꢁyourꢁdealer.  
•ꢁDoꢁnotꢁplaceꢁtheꢁprojectorꢁorꢁheavyꢁobjectsꢁonꢁtheꢁpowerꢁcordꢁandꢁcables.ꢁ  
Also,ꢁdoꢁnotꢁplaceꢁaꢁspread,ꢁcover,ꢁetc,ꢁoverꢁthemꢁbecauseꢁthisꢁcouldꢁresultꢁ  
intheinadvertentplacingofheavyobjectsontheconcealedpowercordorꢁ  
cables.  
•ꢁ Doꢁ notꢁ pullꢁ theꢁ powerꢁ cordꢁ andꢁ cables.ꢁ Whenꢁ connectingꢁ andꢁ  
disconnectingꢁtheꢁpowerꢁcordꢁorꢁcables,ꢁdoꢁitꢁwithꢁyourꢁhandꢁholdingꢁtheꢁplugꢁ  
orꢁconnector.  
•ꢁDoꢁnotꢁplaceꢁtheꢁcordꢁnearꢁtheꢁheater.  
•ꢁAvoidꢁbendingꢁtheꢁpowerꢁcordꢁsharply.  
•ꢁDoꢁnotꢁattemptꢁtoꢁworkꢁonꢁtheꢁpowerꢁcord.  
Be careful in handling the battery of the remote control.  
Incorrecthandlingofthebatterycouldresultinfireorpersonalinjury.Theꢁ  
batteryꢁmayꢁexplodeꢁifꢁnotꢁhandledꢁproperly.  
Keepthebatteryawayfromchildrenandpets.Ifswallowedconsultaꢁ  
physicianꢁimmediatelyꢁforꢁemergencyꢁtreatment.  
•ꢁDoꢁnotꢁallowꢁtheꢁbatteryꢁinꢁaꢁfireꢁorꢁwater.ꢁ  
•ꢁAvoidꢁfireꢁorꢁhigh-temperatureꢁenvironment.  
•ꢁDoꢁnotꢁholdꢁtheꢁbatteryꢁwithꢁtheꢁmetallicꢁtweezers.  
•ꢁKeepꢁtheꢁbatteryꢁinꢁaꢁdark,ꢁcoolꢁandꢁdryꢁplay.  
•ꢁDoꢁnotꢁshortꢁcircuitꢁtheꢁbattery.  
•ꢁDoꢁnotꢁrecharge,ꢁdisassembleꢁorꢁsolderꢁtheꢁbattery.  
•ꢁDoꢁnotꢁgiveꢁtheꢁbatteryꢁaꢁphysicalꢁimpact.  
•ꢁUseꢁonlyꢁtheꢁbatteryꢁspecifiedꢁinꢁtheꢁotherꢁmanualꢁofꢁthisꢁprojector.ꢁ  
•ꢁMakeꢁsureꢁtheꢁplusꢁandꢁminusꢁterminalsꢁareꢁcorrectlyꢁalignedꢁwhenꢁloadingꢁ  
theꢁbattery.ꢁ  
Ifyouobservealeakageofthebattery,wipeouttheflowerandthenꢁ  
replaceꢁtheꢁbattery.ꢁIfꢁtheꢁflowerꢁadheresꢁyourꢁbodyꢁorꢁclothes,ꢁrinseꢁwellꢁwithꢁ  
water.  
•ꢁObeyꢁtheꢁlocalꢁlawsꢁonꢁdisposingꢁtheꢁbattery.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety Precautions (continued)  
CAUTION  
Be careful in moving the projector.  
Neglectꢁcouldꢁresultꢁinꢁanꢁinjuryꢁorꢁdamage.  
Donotmovetheprojectorduringuse.Beforemoving,disconnecttheꢁ  
powercordandallexternalconnections,andclosetheslidelensdoororꢁ  
attachꢁtheꢁlensꢁcap.  
•ꢁAvoidꢁanyꢁimpactꢁorꢁshockꢁtoꢁtheꢁprojector.ꢁ  
•ꢁDoꢁnotꢁdragꢁtheꢁprojector.  
•ꢁForꢁmovingꢁtheꢁprojector,ꢁuseꢁtheꢁenclosedꢁcaseꢁorꢁbagꢁifꢁprovided.  
Do not put anything on top of the projector.  
Placinganythingontheprojectorcouldresultinlossofbalanceorfalling,ꢁ  
andcauseaninjuryordamage.Usespecialcautioninhouseholdswhereꢁ  
childrenꢁareꢁpresent.  
Do not attach anything other than specified things to the projector.  
Neglectꢁcouldꢁresultꢁinꢁanꢁinjuryꢁorꢁdamage.  
Someprojectorhasascrewthreadinalenspart.Donotattachanythingꢁ  
otherꢁthanꢁspecifiedꢁoptionsꢁ(suchꢁasꢁconversionꢁlens)ꢁtoꢁtheꢁscrewꢁthread.  
Avoid a smoky, humid or dusty place.  
Placingtheprojectorinasmoke,ahighlyhumid,dustyplace,oilysootorꢁ  
corrosiveꢁgasꢁcouldꢁresultꢁinꢁfireꢁorꢁelectricalꢁshock.ꢁ  
Donotplacetheprojectornearasmoky,humidordustyplace(ex.ꢁ  
asmokingspace,akitchen,abeach,etc.).Donotplacetheprojectorꢁ  
outdoors.  
•ꢁDoꢁnotꢁuseꢁaꢁhumidifierꢁnearꢁtheꢁprojector.  
Take care of the air filter to normal ventilate.  
Theꢁairꢁfilterꢁshouldꢁbeꢁcleanedꢁperiodically.ꢁIfꢁtheꢁairꢁfilterꢁbecomesꢁcloggedꢁ  
bydustorthelike,internaltemperaturerisesandcouldcausemalfunction.ꢁ  
TheprojectormaydisplaythemessagesuchasCHECKꢁTHEꢁAIRꢁFLOW”ꢁ  
orꢁturnꢁoffꢁtheꢁprojector,ꢁtoꢁpreventꢁtheꢁinternalꢁheatꢁlevelꢁrising.  
•ꢁWhenꢁtheꢁindicatorsꢁorꢁaꢁmessageꢁpromptsꢁyouꢁtoꢁcleanꢁtheꢁairꢁfilter,ꢁcleanꢁ  
theꢁairꢁfilterꢁasꢁsoonꢁasꢁpossible.ꢁ  
•ꢁIfꢁtheꢁsoilingꢁwillꢁnotꢁcomeꢁoffꢁtheꢁairꢁfilter,ꢁorꢁitꢁbecomesꢁdamaged,ꢁreplaceꢁ  
theꢁairꢁfilter.  
Usetheairfilterofthespecifiedtypeonly.Pleaseordertheairfilterꢁ  
specifiedꢁinꢁtheꢁotherꢁmanualꢁofꢁthisꢁprojectorꢁtoꢁyourꢁdealer.ꢁ  
•ꢁWhenꢁyouꢁreplaceꢁtheꢁlamp,ꢁreplaceꢁalsoꢁtheꢁairꢁfilter.ꢁTheꢁairꢁfilterꢁmayꢁbeꢁ  
attachedꢁwhenꢁyouꢁbuyꢁaꢁreplacementꢁlampꢁforꢁthisꢁprojector.  
•ꢁDoꢁnotꢁturnꢁonꢁtheꢁprojectorꢁwithoutꢁairꢁfilter.  
Avoid a high temperature environment.  
Theheatcouldhaveadverseinfluenceonthecabinetoftheprojectorandꢁ  
otherꢁparts.ꢁDoꢁnotꢁplaceꢁtheꢁprojector,ꢁtheꢁremoteꢁcontrolꢁandꢁotherꢁpartsꢁinꢁ  
directꢁsunlightꢁorꢁnearꢁaꢁhotꢁobjectꢁsuchꢁasꢁheater,ꢁetc.  
Avoid Magnetism.  
Manufacturestronglyrecommendstoavoidanymagneticcontactthatisnotꢁ  
shieldedorprotectedonorneartheprojectoritself.(ie.,.MagneticSecurityꢁ  
Devices,orotherprojectoraccessorythatcontainsmagneticmaterialthathasnotꢁ  
beenprovidedbythemanufactureetc.)Magneticobjectsmaycauseinterruptionꢁ  
ofꢁtheꢁprojector'sꢁinternalꢁmechanicalꢁperformanceꢁwhichꢁmayꢁinterfereꢁwithꢁcoolingꢁ  
fansꢁspeedꢁorꢁstopping,ꢁandꢁmayꢁcauseꢁtheꢁprojectorꢁtoꢁcompletelyꢁshutꢁdown  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety Precautions (continued)  
CAUTION  
Remove the power cord for complete separation.  
•ꢁForꢁsafetyꢁpurposes,ꢁdisconnectꢁtheꢁpowerꢁcordꢁifꢁtheꢁprojectorꢁisꢁnotꢁtoꢁbeꢁ  
usedꢁforꢁprolongedꢁperiodsꢁofꢁtime.  
Beforecleaning,turnoffandunplugtheprojector.Neglectcouldresultinꢁ  
fireꢁorꢁelectricalꢁshock.ꢁ  
Disconnectꢁtheꢁ  
plugꢁfromꢁtheꢁ  
powerꢁoutlet.  
Ask your dealer to cleaning inside of the projector about every  
year.  
Accumulationsꢁofꢁdustꢁinsideꢁtheꢁprojectorꢁcauseꢁresultꢁinꢁfireꢁorꢁmalfunction.ꢁ  
Cleaninginsideismoreeffectiveifperformedbeforeeveryhumidperiodsꢁ  
suchꢁasꢁrainyꢁseason.  
•ꢁDoꢁnotꢁcleanꢁinsideꢁyourselfꢁbecauseꢁitꢁisꢁdangerous.ꢁ  
NOTE  
Do not give the remote control any physical impact.  
Aꢁphysicalꢁimpactꢁcouldꢁcauseꢁdamageꢁorꢁmalfunctionꢁofꢁtheꢁremoteꢁcontrol.  
•ꢁTakeꢁcareꢁnotꢁtoꢁdropꢁtheꢁremoteꢁcontrol.  
•ꢁDoꢁnotꢁplaceꢁtheꢁprojectorꢁorꢁheavyꢁobjectsꢁonꢁtheꢁremoteꢁcontrol.  
Take care of the lens.  
Closetheslidelensdoororattachthelenscaptopreventthelenssurfacebeingꢁ  
scratchedꢁwhenꢁtheꢁprojectorꢁisꢁnotꢁused.  
•ꢁDoꢁnotꢁtouchꢁtheꢁlensꢁtoꢁpreventꢁfogꢁorꢁdirtꢁofꢁtheꢁlensꢁthatꢁcauseꢁdeteriorationꢁofꢁdisplayꢁ  
quality.  
Usecommerciallyavailablelenstissuetocleanthelens(usedtocleancameras,ꢁ  
eyeglasses,ꢁetc.).ꢁBeꢁcarefulꢁnotꢁtoꢁscratchꢁtheꢁlensꢁwithꢁhardꢁobjects.ꢁ  
Take care of the cabinet and the remote control.  
Incorrectꢁcareꢁcouldꢁhaveꢁadverseꢁinfluenceꢁsuchꢁasꢁdiscoloration,ꢁpeelingꢁpaint,ꢁetc.  
Useasoftclothtocleanthecabinetandcontrolpaneloftheprojectorandtheremoteꢁ  
control.ꢁWhenꢁexcessivelyꢁsoiledꢁdiluteꢁaꢁneutralꢁdetergentꢁinꢁwater,ꢁwetꢁandꢁwringꢁoutꢁtheꢁ  
softꢁclothꢁandꢁafterwardꢁwipeꢁwithꢁaꢁdryꢁsoftꢁcloth.ꢁDoꢁnotꢁuseꢁundilutedꢁdetergentꢁdirectly.  
•ꢁDoꢁnotꢁuseꢁanꢁaerosolꢁsprays,ꢁsolvents,ꢁvolatileꢁsubstancesꢁorꢁabrasiveꢁcleaner.  
•ꢁBeforeꢁusingꢁchemicalꢁwipes,ꢁbeꢁsureꢁtoꢁreadꢁandꢁobserveꢁtheꢁinstructions.  
•ꢁDoꢁnotꢁallowꢁlong-termꢁcloseꢁcontactꢁwithꢁrubberꢁorꢁvinyl.  
About bright spots or dark spots.  
Althoughꢁbrightꢁspotsꢁorꢁdarkꢁspotsꢁmayꢁappearꢁonꢁtheꢁscreen,ꢁthisꢁisꢁaꢁuniqueꢁcharacteristicꢁofꢁ  
liquidꢁcrystalꢁdisplays,ꢁandꢁsuchꢁdoꢁnotꢁconstituteꢁorꢁimplyꢁaꢁmachineꢁdefect.  
Be careful of printing of the LCD panel.  
Ifꢁtheꢁprojectorꢁcontinuesꢁprojectingꢁaꢁstillꢁimage,ꢁinactiveꢁimagesꢁorꢁꢆꢅ:9ꢁaspectꢁimagesꢁꢁinꢁ  
caseꢁofꢁꢃ:ꢂꢁpanel,ꢁetc.,ꢁforꢁlongꢁtime,ꢁtheꢁLCDꢁpanelꢁmightꢁpossiblyꢁbeꢁprinted.ꢁ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety Precautions (continued)  
NOTE  
About consumables.  
Lamp,ꢁLCDꢁpanels,ꢁpolarizorsꢁandꢁotherꢁopticalꢁcomponents,ꢁandꢁairꢁfilterꢁandꢁcoolingꢁfansꢁ  
haveꢁaꢁdifferentꢁlifetimeꢁinꢁeach.ꢁTheseꢁpartsꢁmayꢁneedꢁtoꢁbeꢁreplacedꢁafterꢁaꢁlongꢁusageꢁ  
time.  
•ꢁThisꢁproductꢁisn’tꢁdesignedꢁforꢁcontinuousꢁuseꢁofꢁlongꢁtime.ꢁInꢁtheꢁcaseꢁofꢁcontinuousꢁuseꢁ  
forhoursormore,oruseforhoursormoreeveryday(evenifitisn’tcontinuous),orꢁ  
repetitioususe,thelifetimemaybeshortened,andthesepartsmayneedtobereplacedꢁ  
evenꢁifꢁoneꢁyearꢁhasꢁnotꢁpassedꢁsinceꢁtheꢁbeginningꢁofꢁusing.  
•ꢁAnyincliningusebeyondtheadjustmentrangeexplainedintheseuser’smanualsmayꢁ  
shortenꢁtheꢁlifetimesꢁofꢁtheꢁconsumables.  
Before turning on the power, make the projector cool down adequately.  
Afterꢁturningꢁtheꢁprojectorꢁoff,ꢁpushingꢁtheꢁrestartꢁswitchꢁorꢁinterruptingꢁofꢁtheꢁpowerꢁsupply,ꢁ  
maketheprojectorcooldownadequately.Operationinahightemperaturestateoftheꢁ  
projectorꢁcausesꢁaꢁdamageꢁofꢁtheꢁelectrodeꢁandꢁun-lightingꢁofꢁtheꢁlamp.  
Avoid strong rays.  
Anystrongray(suchasdirectraysofthesunorroomlighting)ontotheremotecontrolꢁ  
sensorsꢁcouldꢁinvalidateꢁtheꢁremoteꢁcontrol.ꢁ  
Avoid radio interference.  
Anyꢁinterferingꢁradiationꢁcouldꢁcauseꢁdisorderedꢁimageꢁorꢁnoises.  
•ꢁAvoidꢁradioꢁgeneratorꢁsuchꢁasꢁaꢁmobileꢁtelephone,ꢁtransceiver,ꢁetc.ꢁaroundꢁtheꢁprojector.  
About displaying characteristic.  
Theꢁ displayꢁ conditionꢁ ofꢁ theꢁ projectorꢁ (suchꢁ asꢁ color,ꢁ contrast,ꢁ etc.)ꢁ dependsꢁ onꢁ  
characteristicꢁofꢁtheꢁscreen,ꢁbecauseꢁtheꢁprojectorꢁusesꢁaꢁliquidꢁcrystalꢁdisplayꢁpanel.ꢁTheꢁ  
displayꢁconditionꢁcanꢁdifferꢁfromꢁtheꢁdisplayꢁofꢁCRT.  
•ꢁDoꢁnotꢁuseꢁaꢁpolarizedꢁscreen.ꢁItꢁcanꢁcauseꢁredꢁimage.  
Turn the power on/off in right order.  
Topreventanytrouble,turnon/offtheprojectorinrightordermentionedbelowunlessꢁ  
specifying.  
•ꢁPowerꢁonꢁtheꢁprojectorꢁbeforeꢁtheꢁcomputerꢁorꢁvideoꢁtapeꢁrecorder.  
•ꢁPowerꢁoffꢁtheꢁprojectorꢁafterꢁtheꢁcomputerꢁorꢁvideoꢁtapeꢁrecorder.  
Take care not to fatigue your eyes.  
Restꢁtheꢁeyesꢁperiodically.  
Set the sound volume at a suitable level to avoid bothering other people.  
Itisbettertokeepthevolumelevellowandclosethewindowsatnighttoprotecttheꢁ  
neighborhoodꢁenvironment.  
Connecting with notebook computer  
Whenconnectingwithnotebookcomputer,settovalidtheRGBexternalimageoutputꢁ  
(settingꢁCRTꢁdisplayꢁorꢁsimultaneousꢁdisplayꢁofꢁLCDꢁandꢁCRT).  
Pleaseꢁreadꢁinstructionꢁmanualꢁofꢁtheꢁnotebookꢁforꢁmoreꢁinformation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lamp  
WARNING  
HIGH VOLTAGE HIGH TEMPERATURE HIGH PRESSURE  
Theprojectorusesahigh-pressuremercuryglasslamp.Thelampcanbreak with a  
loud bang, or burn out,ifjoltedorscratched,handledwhilehot,orwornovertime.ꢁ  
Noteꢁthatꢁeachꢁlampꢁhasꢁaꢁdifferentꢁlifetime,ꢁandꢁsomeꢁmayꢁburstꢁorꢁburnꢁoutꢁsoonꢁafterꢁ  
youstartusingthem.Inaddition,whenthebulbbursts,itispossibleforshards of  
glassꢁtoꢁflyꢁintoꢁtheꢁlampꢁhousing,ꢁandꢁforꢁgas containing mercuryꢁtoꢁescapeꢁfromꢁtheꢁ  
projector’sꢁventꢁholes.  
About disposal of a lampꢁ•ꢁThisꢁproductꢁcontainsꢁaꢁmercuryꢁlamp;ꢁdoꢁnotꢁputꢁinꢁtrash.ꢁ  
Disposeꢁofꢁinꢁaccordꢁwithꢁenvironmentalꢁlaws.  
Forꢁlampꢁrecycling,ꢁgoꢁtoꢁwww.lamprecycle.org.ꢁ(inꢁUSA)ꢁ  
Forꢁproductꢁdisposal,ꢁcontactꢁyourꢁlocalꢁgovernmentꢁagencyꢁorꢁwww.eiae.orgꢁ(inꢁtheꢁUS)ꢁ  
orꢁwww.epsc.caꢁ(inꢁCanada).ꢁ  
Forꢁmoreꢁinformation,ꢁcallꢁyourꢁdealer.  
•ꢁIfꢁtheꢁlampꢁshouldꢁbreakꢁ(itꢁwillꢁmakeꢁaꢁloudꢁbangꢁwhenꢁitꢁdoes),ꢁunplugꢁ  
thepowercordfromtheoutlet,andmakesuretorequestareplacementꢁ  
lampfromyourlocaldealer.Notethatshardsofglasscoulddamagetheꢁ  
projector’sꢁinternals,ꢁorꢁcauseꢁinjuryꢁduringꢁhandling,ꢁsoꢁpleaseꢁdoꢁnotꢁtryꢁtoꢁ  
cleanꢁtheꢁprojectorꢁorꢁreplaceꢁtheꢁlampꢁyourself.  
•ꢁIfꢁtheꢁlampꢁshouldꢁbreakꢁ(itꢁwillꢁmakeꢁaꢁloudꢁbangꢁwhenꢁitꢁdoes),ꢁventilateꢁ  
theꢁroomꢁwell,ꢁandꢁmakeꢁsureꢁnotꢁtoꢁbreatheꢁtheꢁgasꢁthatꢁcomesꢁoutꢁofꢁtheꢁ  
projectorꢁvents,ꢁorꢁgetꢁitꢁinꢁyourꢁeyesꢁorꢁmouth.  
Beforereplacingthelamp,makesurethepowerswitchisoffandtheꢁ  
powerꢁcableꢁisꢁnotꢁpluggedꢁin,ꢁthenꢁwaitꢁatꢁleastꢁꢃꢄꢁminutesꢁforꢁtheꢁlampꢁtoꢁ  
coolsufficiently.Handlingthelampwhilehotcancauseburns,aswellasꢁ  
damagingꢁtheꢁlamp.  
Disconnectꢁ  
theꢁplugꢁfromꢁ  
theꢁpowerꢁ  
outlet  
•ꢁDoꢁnotꢁopenꢁtheꢁlampꢁcoverꢁwhileꢁtheꢁprojectorꢁisꢁsuspendedꢁfromꢁabove.ꢁ  
Thisisdangerous,sinceifthelamp’sbulbhasbroken,theshardswillꢁ  
falloutwhenthecoverisopened.Inaddition,workinginhighplacesisꢁ  
dangerous,ꢁsoꢁaskꢁyourꢁlocalꢁdealerꢁtoꢁhaveꢁtheꢁlampꢁreplacedꢁevenꢁifꢁtheꢁ  
bulbꢁisꢁnotꢁbroken.  
Donotusetheprojectorwiththelampcoverremoved.ꢁAtthelampꢁ  
replacing,makesurethatthescrewsarescrewedinfirmly.Loosescrewsꢁ  
couldꢁresultꢁinꢁdamageꢁorꢁinjury.  
•ꢁUseꢁtheꢁlampꢁofꢁtheꢁspecifiedꢁtypeꢁonly.  
Ifthelampbreakssoonafterthefirsttimeitisused,itispossiblethatꢁ  
thereꢁareꢁelectricalꢁproblemsꢁelsewhereꢁbesidesꢁtheꢁlamp.ꢁIfꢁthisꢁhappens,ꢁ  
contactꢁyourꢁlocalꢁdealerꢁorꢁaꢁserviceꢁrepresentative.  
•ꢁHandleꢁwithꢁcare:ꢁjoltingꢁorꢁscratchingꢁcouldꢁcauseꢁtheꢁlampꢁbulbꢁtoꢁburstꢁ  
duringꢁuse.  
•ꢁUsingꢁtheꢁlampꢁforꢁlongꢁperiodsꢁofꢁtime,ꢁcouldꢁcauseꢁitꢁdark,ꢁnotꢁtoꢁlightꢁupꢁ  
orꢁtoꢁburst.ꢁWhenꢁtheꢁpicturesꢁappearꢁdark,ꢁorꢁwhenꢁtheꢁcolorꢁtoneꢁisꢁpoor,ꢁ  
pleaseꢁreplaceꢁtheꢁlampꢁasꢁsoonꢁasꢁpossible.ꢁDoꢁnotꢁuseꢁoldꢁ(used)ꢁlamps;ꢁ  
thisꢁisꢁaꢁcauseꢁofꢁbreakage.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Regulatory Notices  
FCC Statement Warning  
ThisꢀdeviceꢀcompliesꢀwithꢀpartꢀꢁꢂꢀofꢀtheꢀFCCꢀRules.ꢀOperationꢀisꢀsubjectꢀtoꢀtheꢀfollowingꢀ  
twoconditions:(ꢁ)Thisdevicemaynotcauseharmfulinterference,and(ꢃ)thisdeviceꢀ  
mustacceptanyinterferencereceived,includinginterferencethatmaycauseundesiredꢀ  
operation.  
WARNING:Thisequipmenthasbeentestedandfoundtocomplywiththelimitsforaꢀ  
ClassBdigitaldevice,pursuanttoPartoftheFCCRules.Theselimitsaredesignedꢀ  
toprovidereasonableprotectionagainstharmfulinterferenceinaresidentialinstallation.ꢀ  
Thisequipmentgenerates,uses,andcanradiateradiofrequencyenergyand,ifnotꢀ  
installedandusedinaccordancewiththeinstructions,maycauseharmfulinterferenceꢀ  
toradiocommunications.However,thereisnoguaranteethatinterferencewillnotoccurꢀ  
inaparticularinstallation.Ifthisequipmentdoescauseharmfulinterferencetoradioꢀ  
ortelevisionreception,whichcanbedeterminedbyturningtheequipmentoffandon,ꢀ  
theuserisencouragedtotrytocorrecttheinterferencebyoneormoreofthefollowingꢀ  
measures:  
-ꢀReorientꢀorꢀrelocateꢀtheꢀreceivingꢀantenna.  
-ꢀIncreaseꢀtheꢀseparationꢀbetweenꢀtheꢀequipmentꢀandꢀreceiver.  
-ꢀConnectꢀtheꢀequipmentꢀintoꢀanꢀoutletꢀonꢀaꢀcircuitꢀdifferentꢀfromꢀthatꢀtoꢀwhichꢀtheꢀreceiverꢀ  
isꢀconnected.  
-ꢀConsultꢀtheꢀdealerꢀorꢀanꢀexperiencedꢀradio/TVꢀtechnicianꢀforꢀhelp.  
INSTRUCTIONS TO USERS:ꢀThisꢀequipmentꢀcompliesꢀwithꢀtheꢀrequirementsꢀofꢀFCCꢀ  
(FederalCommunicationCommission)equipmentprovidedthatthefollowingconditionsꢀ  
aremet.Somecableshavetobeusedwiththecoreset.Usetheaccessorycableoraꢀ  
designated-typecablefortheconnection.Forcablesthathaveacoreonlyatoneend,ꢀ  
connectꢀtheꢀcoreꢀtoꢀtheꢀprojector.  
CAUTION:ꢀChangesꢀorꢀmodificationsꢀnotꢀexpresslyꢀapprovedꢀbyꢀtheꢀpartyꢀresponsibleꢀforꢀ  
complianceꢀcouldꢀvoidꢀtheꢀuser’sꢀauthorityꢀtoꢀoperateꢀtheꢀequipment.  
For the Customers in CANADA  
NOTICE:ꢀThisꢀClassꢀBꢀdigitalꢀapparatusꢀcompliesꢀwithꢀCanadianꢀICES-00ꢄ.  
Warranty And After-Service  
Unlessꢀseenꢀanyꢀabnormalꢀoperationsꢀ(mentionedꢀwithꢀtheꢀfirstꢀparagraphꢀofꢀ  
WARNINGꢀinꢀthisꢀmanual),ꢀwhenꢀaꢀproblemꢀoccursꢀwithꢀtheꢀequipment,ꢀfirstꢀreferꢀtoꢀtheꢀ  
“Troubleshooting”ꢀsectionꢀofꢀtheꢀ“OperatingꢀGuide”,ꢀandꢀrunꢀthroughꢀtheꢀsuggestedꢀchecks.ꢀ  
Ifꢀthisꢀdoesꢀnotꢀresolveꢀtheꢀproblemꢀcontactꢀyourꢀdealerꢀorꢀserviceꢀcompany.ꢀTheyꢀwillꢀtellꢀ  
youꢀwhatꢀwarrantyꢀconditionꢀisꢀapplied.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Audio Visual Products  
2900 Dukane Drive  
St. Charles, Illinois 60174  
www.dukcorp.com/av  
Toll-free: 800-676-2487  
Fax: 630-584-5156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Crosley Washer Dryer 134857400A User Manual
Crown Audio Stereo Amplifier STUDIO AMPLIFIER User Manual
Danby Washer DWM17WDB User Manual
Delta Electronics Power Supply HAL1375 User Manual
Earlex Paint Sprayer HV3900 User Manual
Edelbrock Automobile Parts 15022 User Manual
Fender Guitar 131002 User Manual
Fisher Paykel Washer NZ AU PAC SG User Manual
Fisher Price Video Game Furniture T6349 User Manual
Garmin Air Cleaner G2 User Manual